®
SuperStack II
¨
®
PathBuilder S330/S310
WAN Access Switches Reference Guide
Release 2.03
http://www.3com.com/
Part No. 010-11941-0004
Published December 1998
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPLICATIONS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING INFORMATION
This section contains warning information for AC-powered systems.
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments of performance or procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace the
battery with only the same or equivalent type as that recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Servicing
Service of this unit is to be performed by qualified service personnel only.
Service of certain components and subassemblies in this equipment is
accomplished by the replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). However,
safety agency approval requires that the servicing of other subassemblies within
this product be referred to 3Com’s service personnel.
The trim enclosure and other mechanically secured plates serve as protection
barriers from potential hazardous internal areas. No attempt should be made to
troubleshoot internal components with these protective barriers removed
without first disconnecting the equipment from main power.
Rack Mounting
This equipment is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of
the combination is determined by the applicable safety agency in the country in
which it is installed. This includes UL in the U.S.A., CSA in Canada, and TUV in
Europe.
CAUTION: Do not block the ventilation openings on the top and bottom of the
unit during installation. A minimum of 1 rack unit (1.75”) space is required.
Rack configurations with certain combinations of 3Com equipment installed in
racks with a height greater than 50” (127 cm) may require a counter-balance
weight, a stabilizer bar, or anti-tip legs to ensure rack stability in accordance
with safety agency regulations.
CAUTION: When attaching the rack-mount ears, you must use the
factory-supplied screws. Using screws other than those supplied with the
rack-mount ears voids your warranty and could damage the PCB.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
CHAPTER : WARNING INFORMATION
Power and Power
Cords
This equipment is not intended for use with IT power distribution systems
whose line to line voltage exceeds 250 VAC RMS defined by EN 60950 as
having no direct connection to earth. The PathBuilder S330/S310 will
auto-configure for 115 VAC or 220-240 VAC.
NORTH AMERICAN APPLICATIONS: Use a UL Listed and CSA Certified Cord Set
rated 6 amps, consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT three
conductor cord maximum of 15 feet in length, with a NEMA 5-15P plug.
INTERNATIONAL APPLICATIONS: The power supply cords used with this
equipment should be harmonized with all local standards applicable in the
country in which it is installed.
Safety agency compliance requires this unit to be connected to branch circuits
with overcurrent protection £ 20A for North American applications and £ 10A
for international applications.
The power supply cord must be disconnected when servicing all components or
subsystems.
EMI
FCC - This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy,
and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against
such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference. These tests were conducted with shielded
communications cables with metal connector hoods; the use of unshielded
cables may void this compliance.
Canada - This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Europe - This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference, in which case, the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Safety Classification
of Ports for
The following port types in the product range are classified according to the
Harmonized Europeans Standard EN41003, subclause 4.1.3, as follows:
Connection to
Telecommunications
Networks
E1/E3 - TNV normally operating within SELV limits (TNV-1)
1Telecommunications Network Voltage (EN60950, subclause 1.2.8.8)
2Safety Extra-Low Voltage (EN60950, subclause 1.2.8.5)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATORY
INFORMATION
This section describes the compliance of the SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S330
and the SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches (PathBuilder
S330/S310) with FCC, Industry Canada, and CE regulations.
FCC Part 68 Statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules. On the product is a label that contains the FCC
registration number for this device. If requested, you must provide this
information to the telephone company.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or
premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant.
See installation instructions for details.
If this device causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be
required. The telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If
this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for
you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment or for repair or warranty
information, please follow the applicable procedures explained in the Technical
Support section of this manual (Appendix A).
Canadian CS-03
Approval Information
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means
that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational, and safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to your satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, you should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. You must
also install the equipment using an acceptable method of connection. In some
cases, the inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be
extended by means of a certified connector assembly. You should be aware that
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in
some situations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xii
CHAPTER : SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATORY INFORMATION
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations you
make to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request that you disconnect the
equipment.
CE Notice
Marking by the symbol CE indicates compliance of the equipment with the
EMC, Telecom and Low Voltage dIrectives of the European Community. Such
marking is indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following
technical standards.
EN55022 - Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference
characteristics of information technology equipment.
EN50082-1 - Electromagnetic compatibility - generic immunity standard part 1:
residential, commercial, and light industrial.
CTR 12 - Connection of 2 Mbit/s Unstructured Leased Lines.
CTR13 - Connection to 2 Mbit/s Structured Leased Lines.
EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical
Business Equipment.
EN 41003 - Particular safety requirements for electrical equipment to be
connected to Telecom networks.
WARNING: This customer equipment is to be installed and maintained by
service personnel as defined by AS/NZS 3260 clause 1.2.14.3. (service
Personnel). Incorrect connection of connected equipment to the General
Purpose Outlet could result in a hazardous situation.
WARNING: Safety requirements are not fulfilled unless the equipment is
connected to a wall socket outlet with protective earth contact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
About This Guide provides an overview of this guide, tells you where to look for
specific information, and describes guide conventions.
Introduction
This guide describes how to install and configure the SuperStack® II PathBuilder®
S330 and SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches (PathBuilder
S330/S310). It is intended for network administrators, system engineers, field
engineers, and other personnel responsible for installing, configuring, and
managing PathBuilder products.
If the information in the Release Notes shipped with your product differs from the
information in this guide, follow the Release Notes.
Most user guides and release notes are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader
Portable Document Format (PDF) or HTML on the 3Com World Wide Web site:
http://www.3com.com/
Table 1 Where to Find Specific Information
If you are looking for...
Turn to...
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Descriptions of the features and benefits of the PathBuilder S330/S310
System specifications
Lists of PathBuilder S330/S310 parts and options available for purchase
Installation instructions
Information on how to get started using the PathBuilder S330/S310
Instructions for using the PathBuilder S330/S310 menus
Instructions for configuring PathBuilder S330/S310 modules and ports
Instructions for building virtual circuits
Instructions for setting up video conference sessions
Instructions for configuring the Voice Compression module
Instructions for viewing and clearing alarms
Lists of supported alarms
Information about setting loopbacks and the types of loopbacks available
Instructions for viewing performance statistics and information about the
types of statistics available
Technical support information
Appendix A
Appendix B
Reference information about the specific interfaces and applications you
can use with the PathBuilder S330/S310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions
Table 2 Notice Icons
Icon
Notice Type
Description
Information note
Information that describes important features or
instructions
Caution
Warning
Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or
potential damage to an application, system, or device
Information that alerts you to potential personal injury
Table 3 Text Conventions
Convention Description
Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen.
The words “enter”
and “type”
When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type
something, and then press the Return or Enter key. Do not press the
Return or Enter key when an instruction simply says “type.”
[Key] names
Key names appear in text in one of two ways:
n
Referred to by their labels, such as “the Return key” or “the Escape
key”
n
Written with brackets, such as [Return] or [Esc].
If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are
linked with a plus sign (+). Example:
Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del].
Menu commands
and buttons
Menu commands or button names appear in italics. Example:
From the Help menu, select Contents.
Words in italicized
type
Italics emphasize a point or denote new terms at the place where they
are defined in the text.
Words in bold-face Bold text denotes key features.
type
Related
Documentation
In addition to this guide, the following documentation may help you use the
PathBuilder S330/S310:
PathBuilder S330/S310 Release Notes—Provides configuration help and
information about new features and any known limitations and issues found in
the release.
PathBuilder Switch Manager User Guide—Describes how to use PathBuilder
Switch Manager to configure and manage PathBuilder WAN switches. Using
PathBuilder Switch Manager, you can configure shelf, device, and circuit
information; use a loopback panel to diagnose port cards; view line and interface
statistics; and perform administrative functions such as configuring trap
destinations and setting SNMP community strings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1
This chapter describes the SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S330 and SuperStack® II
PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches (PathBuilder S330/S310), and lists
PathBuilder S330 and PathBuilder S310 system specifications. It includes the
following sections:
n
n
n
PathBuilder S330/S310 The PathBuilder S330 WAN access switch provides cost-effective T1/nxT1 or
Overview
E1/nxE1 connections between local campus and enterprise networks via private
leased line or public carrier ATM services so you can extend high-speed Internet
access, Frame Relay, and ATM network service, as well as voice and video, out to
your branch offices. Using the built-in ATM Forum standard-based inverse
multiplexing capabilities, you can integrate voice, video, and high-speed data
services over the same WAN link.
The PathBuilder S330 and PathBuilder S310 use basically the same hardware, with
the PathBuilder S330 providing more interfaces. The following subsections
describe the features of each unit in greater detail.
PathBuilder S330 The PathBuilder S330 base platform offers the following features:
Features
n
T1/nxT1 ATM UNI or E1/nxE1 ATM UNI with up to four interfaces for
aggregated high-speed of 6Mbps WAN access. Each user-to-network interface
(UNI) can be used alone or bundled into a group using the Inverse Multiplexing
for ATM (IMA) standard, accommodating branch office growth from a single
T1/E1 (1.5/2 Mbps) bandwidth to four T1s/E1s (6/8 Mbps).
The PathBuilder S330 allows up to 70 msec of differential delay between
T1s/E1s in a single IMA bundle. The unit also supports an automatic
mechanism for removing failed lines from an IMA bundle, ensuring the
resiliency required for your mission-critical applications.
n
n
Multiple connections to Ethernet segments over ATM WAN and support of
bridging, including learning, aging, filtering, and Spanning Tree, through the
Ethernet module.
Support of Frame Relay (service and network) interworking, ATM DXI, and
SDLC/HDLC pass-through, through the high-performance serial frame data
interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
n
Choice of either single-mode or multi-mode OC3/STM-1 (separate units),
through the OC3/STM-1 module. Single-mode enables higher-speed trunking if
you have access to fiber WAN, while multi-mode is ideal for connecting
high-speed servers, switches, or hubs equipped with multi-mode fiber
connections.
n
n
Three expansion slots, allowing you to add other advanced features, such as
T1-DSX or E1 CBR for voice and video, voice compression, or DS3/E3.
4x switch switching architecture, including four priority queues (three queues
shaped and one bulk shaper) with user-defined queue sizes and early and
partial packet discard capability.
n
Device management via VT100 menu-driven interface, Telnet, or SNMP, with
local, remote, and in-band access.
The following optional modules are available for use with the PathBuilder S330:
n
n
n
The four-port CBR module services traffic generated by your existing PBXs,
channels, T1/E1 multiplexers, CSU/DSUs, and video conferencing devices. The
CBR module consists of one V.35/RS-449 and three T1-DSX or E1 interfaces,
which support both structured and unstructured services, in accordance with
the ATM Forum’s Circuit Emulation Service (CES) specifications. The CBR
module provides a smooth migration from legacy CBR service (PBX/voice/video)
to ATM service. It also supports all relevant ATM and T1/E1 standards, ensuring
easy integration of existing equipment into new ATM networks.
The one-port Voice Compression module (VCM) is similar in function to the
CBR module, but it employs compression algorithms that allow more voice calls
to be placed through the same bandwidth. The VCM’s T1-DSX/E1 interface
connects to a PBX trunk, which may use CAS or CCS signaling. Its 24/31 DSO
channels can carry individual voice, fax, modem, or data connections. You can
also bundle multiple DSOs to provide connections for high-rate applications
such as video conference or multiple-link PPP. For CCS, a DSO is used as an
ISDN D-channel for carrying signal messages.
The DS3/E3 module provides a DS3 or E3 interface, typically used for
terminating/accessing the public or private ATM WAN services. However,
depending on your local applications, you can also use these modules for
taking local DS3 or E3 ATM traffic across the WAN.
expansion slot 7, Voice Compression module in slot 8, and DS3/E3 UNI module in
slot 9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PathBuilder S330/S310 Overview
5
Figure 1 PathBuilder S330 WAN Access Switch
Video/Audio
PBX
PBX
Codec
V.35/
T1-DSX/E1
T1-DSX/E1
Network
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
V.35/
RS-232
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
n x T1/E1 IMA
10BASE-T
NMS Console
LAN
OC3/STM-1
Router
PathBuilder S310 The PathBuilder S310 is a feature-restricted version of the PathBuilder S330
Features providing remote site CPE access. Its physical appearance is the same as that of the
PathBuilder S330 but its software does not enable all the ports. You can upgrade
from the PathBuilder S310 to the PathBuilder S330 (multi-mode fiber model)
simply by purchasing software.
The PathBuilder S310 base platform offers the following features:
n
Single T1/E1 UNI.
n
Multiple connections to Ethernet segments over ATM WAN and support of
bridging, including learning, aging, and filtering, through the Ethernet module.
n
n
Support of Frame Relay (service and network) interworking, ATM DXI, and
SDLC/HDLC pass-through, through the high-performance serial frame data
interface.
Three expansion slots, allowing you to add other advanced features, such as
T1-DSX or E1 CBR for voice and video, voice compression, or DS3/E3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The following optional modules are available for use with the PathBuilder S310:
n
The two-port CBR module services traffic generated by your existing PBXs,
channels, T1/E1 multiplexers, CSU/DSUs, and video conferencing devices. The
CBR module consists of one V.35/RS-449 and one T1-DSX or E1 interface,
which support both structured and unstructured services, in accordance with
the ATM Forum’s Circuit Emulation Service (CES) specifications. The CBR
module provides a smooth migration from legacy CBR service (PBX/voice/video)
to ATM service. It also supports all relevant ATM and T1/E1 standards, ensuring
easy integration of existing equipment into new ATM networks.
n
The one-port Voice Compression module (VCM) is similar in function to the CBR
module, but it employs compression algorithms that allow more voice calls to
be placed through the same bandwidth. The VCM’s T1-DSX/E1 interface
connects to a PBX trunk, which may use CAS or CCS signaling. Its 24/31 DSO
channels can carry individual voice, fax, modem, or data connections. You can
also bundle multiple DSOs to provide connections for high-rate applications
such as video conference or multiple-link PPP. For CCS, a DSO is used as an
ISDN D-channel for carrying signal messages.
expansion slot 7 and the Voice Compression module in slot 8.
Figure 2 PathBuilder S310 WAN Access Switch
Video/Audio
Codec
PBX
PBX
V.35/
T1-DSX/E1
T1-DSX/E1
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
V.35/
RS-232
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
T1/E1
10BASE-T
NMS Console
LAN
Router
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PathBuilder S330/S310 Overview
7
Application Support The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports the following applications:
S330 Only
n
4 x T1/E1 IMA function on the trunk, up to four trunk groups (individual
T1s/E1s)
n
n
Single T1/E1 for PathBuilder S310
S330 Only
OC3/STM-1 UNI port interface (multi-mode or single-mode fiber), compliant
with ATM Forum’s UNI 3.1, ANSI T1.105
n
n
Ethernet interface and bridge function, bridged RFC 1483 and Spanning Tree
Serial V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21 interface frame module, including DXI
protocol, basic frame relay protocol (DLCI to VP/VC conversion), and
transparent HDLC mode of operation
n
n
Structured and unstructured CBR T1-DSX/E1 and V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21
interface
Dynamic bandwidth allocation for structured voice CBR ports—stored signaling
bits are checked and bandwidth is released when an on-hook (idle) condition is
detected
n
n
RS-366-based video dial feature, supporting point-to-point and multi-point
video conferencing
Voice compression, supporting voice activity detection, fax relay, DTMF relay,
and G.729A, G.726, and G.711 compression algorithms.
S330 Only
n
n
DS3/E3 UNI interface
Local management via a VT100 terminal (or a PC emulating one) connected
directly to the PathBuilder S330/S310, or through a Telnet session.
n
n
Software downloading via TFTP, FTP, or direct via RS232
Built-in, menu-driven software for configuring modules, ports, virtual circuits,
and bridges; setting loopbacks; and collecting and displaying alarms.
Key Benefits The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides the following key benefits:
n
Complete integration into existing application environments by supporting
legacy data, video, and voice applications, thereby avoiding costly forklift
upgrades.
n
Video dial feature supports point-to-point and multi-point dialed video
conferencing over ATM networks, including:
n
n
n
n
RS-366 video dial
Static call routing for all destinations
Ideal for video equipment such as H320
Dynamic bandwidth allocation at both the V.35/RS-366 port and the
T1-DSX/E1 port on the CBR module
n
n
Video session dialed through SNMP interface via Telnet and RS232
Simulation of a switched ISDN network over an ATM network
S330 Only
n
Standards-based IMA implementation; the PathBuilder S330 offers T1/nxT1
and E1/nxE1 ATM access with up to four T1/E1 connections, allowing you to
scale up WAN bandwidth as your traffic increases. Each user-to-network
interface (UNI) can be used alone or bundled into a group, providing up to 6/8
Mbps aggregated WAN access speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
n
n
Easily upgradable; no additional hardware required to move from the
PathBuilder S310 to the PathBuilder S330; update your system simply by
purchasing a software upgrade.
A sophisticated traffic management system allows management of a mix of
applications simultaneously, with features such as deep buffers, traffic shaping,
QoS (Quality of Service), and early packet discard, to give you the most
effective wide-area ATM bandwidth use and ensure applications integrity.
n
n
Embedded management includes a full IP stack (Telnet, TFTP, and SNMP) and
flash memory for sophisticated yet simple network management.
Comprehensive feature support, including resiliency of nxT1/E1 IMA (S330
only) and redundant power for protection against power failure, ensures
maximum application and network uptime.
n
n
3Com SuperStack II compliance provides common look and feel hardware and
integrated network management solutions.
3Com SuperStack II Redundant Power Supply (RPS).
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Ethernet 10 Base T
V.35/RS422
1
1
OC3/STM-1
1 (single-mode or multi-mode)
4
T1/E1 UNI
Mechanical:
Shelf dimensions
19” rack mountable
Rack mount spacing
Cooling
3.5” x 17” x 15.25” (H x W D)
Yes (with brackets)
2 RMS
2 fans @ 37 CRM each (deregulated 20%)
15 lbs. per shelf
Unit weight (approx.)
Shipping weight (approx.)
Input power requirements
20 lbs. per shelf
90-264 VAC, 50-60 Hz (110/220 self sensing),
standard grounded outlet or -42 to -60 VDC
Power consumption
Maximum current
60 watts typical, 90 watts max
1.5A @110VAC
0.75A @ 220VAC
3A @ 48VDC
Environmental:
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
0°to 45° C
-40° to 70°C
95% @ +40°C (non-condensing)
14000 ft.
Altitude
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
9
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
Regulatory compliance
Safety
UL listed (1950, 3rd edition)
CSA 22.2
EN60950
FCC Part 68
Emissions
STANDARDS
ATM Forum
ANSI
FCC Part 15, Class A
UNI 3.x, T1/E1 CES 2.0, IMA, ATM DXI 1.0
T1.403, T1.617 Annex D
TIA/EIA
EIA232, 574, 449/422/423, 366
Pubs 62411 and 54016
AT&T
Frame Relay Forum
IETF RFCs
FRF.5 and FRF.8
1213, 1211, 1483, 1490, 1406, 1493, 1643
MOTHERBOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Main microprocessor
Memory usage
RISC
Flash EPROM, 8Mbytes
DRAM, 16Mbytes
Front panel LEDs:
Common
Power, Status, Alert
Tx, Rx, Link
Ethernet
Serial
TD, RD
OC3/STM-1
Alert, Active
Alert, Active
T1 (1-4)
Management Interface
Interface type
Connector type
Connector pinouts
RS-232C
Female DB-9
PIN 1 - Carrier Detect
PIN 2 - Rx Data
PIN 3 - Tx Data
PIN 4 - DTR
PIN 5 - Signal Ground
PIN 6 - DSR
PIN 7 - RTS
PIN 8 - CTS
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
Ethernet Interface
Number of ports
Interface type
1
VC level, dual leaky bucket, 56Kbps to 6Mbps
Connector type
Connector pinouts
RJ48
PIN 1 - Tx+
PIN 2 - Tx-
PIN 3 - Rx+
PIN 4 -
PIN 5 -
PIN 6 - Rx-
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Data support
10Base-T, IEEE 802.3
Bridging with filtering, RFC 1483 (LLC_SNAP)
AAL5, peak rate
ATM support
Shaping
Forwarding rate
n x T1 / n x E1 Interface
Number of ports
Type of interface
Connector type
Connector pinouts
Greater than 7000pps
4
T1 or E1 (with integral CSU and DSX)
RJ48C or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Line Framing
Line Coding
ESF, SF (D4), or No Framing for T1
G. 703/704 for E1
B8ZS for T1 (AMI for special applications)
HDB3 for E1
ATM framing
ATM support
LBO
HEC (ITU-T G.804), I.432
T1/E1 UNI (with IMA)
0, 7.5, 15.0, 22.5dB (CSU)
0 ~655 ft. (DSX)
Electrical interface
Attenuation
CSU/DSX
0, 7.5, 15db
Yes
Payload scrambling
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
11
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
OC3/STM-1 Interface
Number of ports
Interface type
Connector type
Line Code
1
SR or IR
Duplex SC
SONET scrambled, NRZ
Multi-mode or single-mode
1300nm
Fiber Type
Wavelength
Receiver input power
-30.0 dBm minimum (SR), -31 dBm minimum (IR)
-14.0 dBm maximum (SR), -8 dBm maximum (IR)
-19.0 dBm minimum (SR), -15 dBm minimum (IR)
-14.0 dBm maximum (SR), -8 dBm maximum (IR)
Internal or external
Transmit output power
Clock
Application support
ATM support
Serial Interface
Number of ports
Interface type
VP or VC level, UNI
ATM UNI, 3.x
1
HD 60-pin (DCE or DTE), female; V.35/RS-449/EIA530
(through cable converters)
Data support
ATM support
Clock
Transparent HDLC/SDLC, Frame Relay, ATM DXI
AAL5
DCE or DTE, Internal or external (smooth clock)
VC level, dual leaky bucket
56Kbps to 6Mbps
Shaping
Data rates:
Minimum
56 Kbps
Maximum
6 Mbps
Maximum cable length
Clock outputs
Connector type on unit
50 feet @ 8 Mbps
Smooth clocks on transmit and receive lines to DTE
MOLEX 60-pin female
Connector type on V.35 cable
converter
35-pin Winchester,
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
Chassis Ground
Signal Ground
Req to Send
A
B
C
D
E
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Rcv Line Sig Det
Send Data
F
P
S
T
Receive Data
Terminal Timing
Receive Timing
Send Timing
R
U
V
Y
W
X
AA
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
Connector type at end of
RS-422 cable
DB-37 subminiature,
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
Chassis Ground
Send Data
1
4
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
35
Send Timing
5
6
Receive Data
Req to Send
7
Receive Timing
Clear to Send
Terminal Ready
Receiver Ready
Terminal Timing
Signal Ground
DB-25 subminiature,
8
9
12
13
17
19
Connector type at end of
EIA530 cable
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
1
Chassis Ground
Send Data
2
15
3
14
12
16
19
9
Send Timing
Receive Data
Req to Send
4
Receive Timing
Clear to Send
Terminal Ready
Receiver Ready
Terminal Timing
Signal Ground
17
5
13
23
10
11
20
8
24
7
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
13
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
Connector type at end of X.21 DB-15 subminiature,
cable
female for DCE, male for DTE
X.21 DTE cable pinouts
(60-pin connector) to
DB-15 male
Signal
Name
Pin # on
60-pin
Pin # on
DB-15
Direction (for
serial port)
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
46
15
1
8
9,10
1,2
3,10
5,12
OUT
IN
CTS
DSR
IN
DCD (not used; tristate when in DTE mode)
DTR
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
LL (not used)
SD+
11
12
28
27
2
9
SD-
RD+
4
RD-
11
IN
SCTE+
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
SCT+
SCT-
OUT
OUT
IN
26
25
6
13
IN
IN
IN
Shorting
GR 1
47,48,49
51, 52
Shorting
GR 2
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
X.21 DCE cable pinouts
(60-pin connector) to
DB-15 female
Signal
Name
Pin # on
60-pin
Pin # on
DB-15
Direction
(for QSIM)
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
46
15
1
8
1,2
9,10
3,10
5,12
IN
CTS
OUT
OUT
DSR
DCD (not used; tristate when in DTE mode)
DTR
IN
IN
LL (not used)
SD+
28
27
11
12
2
9
IN
SD-
IN
RD+
4
OUT
OUT
IN
RD-
11
SCTE+
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
IN
24
23
6
OUT
OUT
13
(tristate SCR + and - when in DTE mode,
double term., double buffer)
SCT+
OUT
OUT
SCT-
Shorting
GR 1
47,48
Shorting
GR 2
51, 52
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
15
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
CBR MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Number of ports
Interface type(s)
T1-DSX/E1 physical
Impedance
Framing
4
3 direct T1-DSX/E1, 1 DSU/CSU
3 each RJ48
100 Ohms
D4 or ESF
Line Coding
LBO
AMI or B8ZS
0 - 655 feet
Serial
HD-pin; V.35/RS-449/EIA530/X.21 (see Serial Interface,
under “Motherboard Specifications, above, for
connector pinouts)
Clock
DCE, Internal
Front panel LEDs (1-3)
ALARM, Inservice
Data rates
n x 56Kbps or n x 64Kbps
(structured; n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24) or
1.544 Mbps (unstructured)
ATM support
CAS/CCS support with Dynamic bandwidth
reallocation
Timing
AAL1, ATM CES 2.0
Looped, system, adaptive, SRTS
24 msec (T1-DSX), 32 msec (E1)
CBR
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Class of Service
T1-DSX/E1connector type
T1-DSX/E1 connector pinouts
RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
Connector type at end of
V.35/RS-366 cable
DB-25 subminiature,
female for DCE
From
J1-46
J1-45
J1-35
J1-42
J1-43
J1-44
J1-34
J1-33
J1-28
J1-27
J1-18
J1-17
J1-26
J1-25
J1-22
J1-21
J1-20
J1-19
J1-50
J1-29
J1-31
J1-32
J1-36
J1-37
J1-38
J1-39
J1-40
J1-41
J1-47
J1-59
J1-56
To
J2-A
J2-B
J2-C
J2-D
J2-E
Connector pinouts
Frame Ground
Circuit Ground
RTS
CTS
DSR
DCD
J2-F
DTR
J2-H
J2-K
J2-P
LL
SD+
SD-
J2-S
RD+
J2-R
J2-T
RD-
SCTE+
J2-U
J2-W
J2-V
J2-X
J2-Y
J2-AA
J2-J
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
SCT+
SCT-
366_RI
366_PWI
366_ACR
366_PND
366_DSC
366_DLO
366_NB1
366_NB2
366_NB4
366_NB8
366_CRQ
366_DPR
Signal Ground
SHT GRP 1
J3-6
J3-3
J3-5
J3-13
J3-22
J3-14
J3-15
J3-16
J3-17
J3-4
J3-2
J3-7
J1-49
J1-48
2
2
SHT GRP 2
SHT GRP 3
J1-50
J1-51
J1-53
J1-54
J1-55
J1-56
2
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
17
Table 4 PathBuilder S330 System Specifications
VOICE COMPRESSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Number of ports
Interface type(s)
T1-DSX/E1 physical
Impedance
1
1direct T1-DSX/E1
1 each RJ48
100 Ohms
D4 or ESF
Framing
Line Coding
LBO
AMI or B8ZS
0 - 655 feet
DCE, Internal
Clock
Front panel LEDs (1-7)
PWR, FAIL, TEST, STS 0, STS 1, INS, ALM
Data rates
n x 56Kbps or n x 64Kbps
(structured; n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24)
ATM support
CAS/CCS support with Dynamic bandwidth
reallocation
AAL1, AAL5
Looped, system
AAL5
Timing
Class of Service
T1-DSX/E1connector type
RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
T1-DSX/E1 connector pinouts
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Frame Relay support
Compression Types
FRF.5, FRF.8
G.729A, G. 726, G.711, voice activity detection, fax
relay, DTMF relay
DS3/E3 EXPANSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Number of ports
Interface type(s)
Connector type
ATM Framing
LBO
1
DS3, E3
Coax, BNC
HEC, PLCP
0-250, 250-450
B8ZsS (DS3), HDB3 (E3)
Line Coding
Line Framing
M23 and C-BIT (DS3),
G.751-PLCP, G.804/G832-HEC (E3)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Ethernet 10 Base T
V.35/RS422
1
1
1
T1/E1 UNI
Mechanical:
Shelf dimensions
19” rack mountable
Rack mount spacing
Cooling
3.5” x 17” x 15.25” (H x W D)
Yes (with brackets)
2 RMS
2 fans @ 37 CRM each (deregulated 20%)
15 lbs. per shelf
Unit weight (approx.)
Shipping weight (approx.)
Input power requirements
20 lbs. per shelf
90-264 VAC, 50-60 Hz (110/220 self sensing),
standard grounded outlet or -42 to -60 VDC
Power consumption
Maximum current
60 watts typical, 100 watts max
1.5A @110VAC
0.75A @ 220VAC
3A @ 48VDC
Environmental:
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
0°to 45° C
-40° to 70°C
95% @ +40°C (non-condensing)
14000 ft.
Altitude
Regulatory compliance
Safety
UL listed (1950, 3rd edition)
CSA 22.2
EN60950
FCC Part 68
Emissions
Homologation
STANDARDS
ATM Forum
ANSI
FCC Part 15, Class A
Pending
UNI 3.x, T1/E1 CES 2.0, IMA, ATM DXI 1.0
T1.403, T1.617 Annex D
TIA/EIA
EIA232, RS-449/422/423, 366
Pubs 62411 and 54016
AT&T
Frame Relay Forum
IETF RFCs
FRF.5 and FRF.8
1213, 1211, 1483, 1490, 1406, 1493, 1643
MOTHERBOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Main microprocessor
Memory usage
RISC
Flash EPROM, 8Mbytes
DRAM, 16Mbytes
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
19
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
Front panel LEDs:
Common
Ethernet
Power, Status, Alert
Tx, Rx, Link
Serial
TD, RD
T1
Alert, Active
Management Interface
Interface type
Connector type
Connector pinouts
RS-232C
Female DB-9
PIN 1 - Carrier Detect
PIN 2 - Rx Data
PIN 3 - Tx Data
PIN 4 - DTR
PIN 5 - Signal Ground
PIN 6 - DSR
PIN 7 - RTS
PIN 8 - CTS
Ethernet Interface
Number of ports
Interface type
1
VC level, dual leaky bucket, 56Kbps to 6Mbps
Connector type
Connector pinouts
RJ48
PIN 1 - Tx+
PIN 2 - Tx-
PIN 3 - Rx+
PIN 4 -
PIN 5 -
PIN 6 - Rx-
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Data support
ATM support
Shaping
10Base-T, IEEE 802.3
Bridging with filtering, RFC 1483 (LLC_SNAP)
AAL5, VBR/UBR
Forwarding rate
(continued)
Greater than 7000pps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
T1/E1 UNI Interface
Number of ports
Type of interface
Connector type
1
T1/E1 (with integral CSU and DSX)
RJ48C or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
Connector pinouts
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Framing
D4 or ESF
Line Coding
ATM framing
ATM support
LBO
AMI or B8ZS
G.804 HEC
T1/E1 UNI
0, 7.5, 15.0, 22.5dB (CSU)
0 ~655 ft. (DSX)
Electrical interface
Attenuation
CSU/DSX
0, 7.5, 15db
Yes
Payload scrambling
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
21
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
Serial Interface
Number of ports
Interface type
1
HD 60-pin (DCE or DTE), female; V.35/RS-449/EIA530
(through cable converters)
Data support
ATM support
Clock
Transparent HDLC/SDLC, Frame Relay, ATM DXI
AAL5
DCE or DTE, Internal or external (smooth clock)
VC level, dual leaky bucket
56Kbps to 6Mbps
Shaping
Data rates:
Minimum
56 Kbps
Maximum
6 Mbps
Maximum cable length
Clock outputs
Connector type on unit
50 feet @ 8 Mbps
Smooth clocks on transmit and receive lines to DTE
MOLEX 60-pin female
Connector type on V.35 cable
converter
35-pin Winchester,
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
Chassis Ground
Signal Ground
Req to Send
A
B
C
D
E
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Rcv Line Sig Det
Send Data
F
P
S
T
Receive Data
R
U
V
Y
Terminal Timing
Receive Timing
Send Timing
W
X
AA
Connector type at end of
RS-422 cable
DB-37 subminiature,
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
1
Chassis Ground
Send Data
4
5
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
35
Send Timing
Receive Data
Req to Send
6
7
Receive Timing
Clear to Send
Terminal Ready
Receiver Ready
Terminal Timing
Signal Ground
8
9
12
13
17
19
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
Connector type at end of
EIA530 cable
DB-25 subminiature,
female for DCE, male for DTE
Connector pinouts
A Side B Side
Chassis Ground
Send Data
1
2
14
12
16
19
9
Send Timing
15
3
Receive Data
Req to Send
4
Receive Timing
Clear to Send
Terminal Ready
Receiver Ready
Terminal Timing
Signal Ground
17
5
13
23
10
11
20
8
24
7
Connector type at end of X.21 DB-15 subminiature,
cable female for DCE, male for DTE
X.21 DTE cable pinouts
(60-pin connector) to
DB-15 male
Signal
Name
Pin # on
60-pin
Pin # on
Direction (for
serial port)
DB-15
1
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
46
15
8
9,10
1,2
3,10
5,12
OUT
IN
CTS
DSR
IN
DCD (not used; tristate when in DTE mode)
DTR
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
LL (not used)
SD+
11
12
28
27
2
9
SD-
RD+
4
RD-
11
IN
SCTE+
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
SCT+
SCT-
OUT
OUT
IN
26
25
6
13
IN
IN
IN
Shorting
GR 1
47,48,49
51, 52
Shorting
GR 2
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
23
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
X.21 DCE cable pinouts
(60-pin connector) to
DB-15 female
Signal
Name
Pin # on
60-pin
Pin # on
DB-15
Direction
(for QSIM)
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
46
15
1
8
1,2
9,10
3,10
5,12
IN
CTS
OUT
OUT
DSR
DCD (not used; tristate when in DTE mode)
DTR
IN
IN
LL (not used)
SD+
28
27
11
12
2
9
IN
SD-
IN
RD+
4
OUT
OUT
IN
RD-
11
SCTE+
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
IN
24
23
6
OUT
OUT
13
(tristate SCR + and - when in DTE mode,
double term., double buffer)
SCT+
OUT
OUT
SCT-
Shorting
GR 1
47,48
Shorting
GR 2
51, 52
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
CBR MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Number of ports
Interface type(s)
T1-DSx/E1 physical
Impedance
2
1 direct T1-DSX/E1, 1 DSU/CSU
RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
100 Ohms
Framing
D4 or ESF
Line Coding
AMI or B8ZS
LBO
0 - 655 feet
Serial
HD-pin; V.35/RS-449/EIA530/X.21 (see Serial Interface,
under “Motherboard Specifications, above, for
connector pinouts
Clock
DTE or DCE, Internal or external
ALARM Inservice
Front panel LEDs (1-3)
Data rates
n x 56Kbps or n x 64Kbps
(structured; n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24) or
1.544 Mbps (unstructured)
CAS/CCS support with Dynamic bandwidth
reallocation
ATM support
AAL1, ATM CES 2.0
Looped, system adaptive, SRTS
24 msec (T1), 32 msec (E1
CBR
Timing
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Class of Service
T1-DSX/E1 connector type
T1-DSX/E1 connector pinouts
RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
25
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
Connector type at end of
V.35/RS-366 cable
DB-25 subminiature,
female for DCE
From
J1-46
J1-45
J1-35
J1-42
J1-43
J1-44
J1-34
J1-33
J1-28
J1-27
J1-18
J1-17
J1-26
J1-25
J1-22
J1-21
J1-20
J1-19
J1-50
J1-29
J1-31
J1-32
J1-36
J1-37
J1-38
J1-39
J1-40
J1-41
J1-47
J1-59
J1-56
To
J2-A
J2-B
J2-C
J2-D
J2-E
Connector pinouts
Frame Ground
Circuit Ground
RTS
CTS
DSR
DCD
J2-F
DTR
J2-H
J2-K
J2-P
LL
SD+
SD-
J2-S
RD+
J2-R
J2-T
RD-
SCTE+
J2-U
J2-W
J2-V
J2-X
J2-Y
J2-AA
J2-J
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
SCT+
SCT-
366_RI
366_PWI
366_ACR
366_PND
366_DSC
366_DLO
366_NB1
366_NB2
366_NB4
366_NB8
366_CRQ
366_DPR
Signal Ground
SHT GRP 1
J3-6
J3-3
J3-5
J3-13
J3-22
J3-14
J3-15
J3-16
J3-17
J3-4
J3-2
J3-7
J1-49
J1-48
2
2
SHT GRP 2
SHT GRP 3
J1-50
J1-51
J1-53
J1-54
J1-55
J1-56
2
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 5 PathBuilder S310 System Specifications
VOICE COMPRESSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Number of ports
Interface type(s)
T1-DSX/E1 physical
Impedance
1
1direct T1-DSX/E1
1 each RJ48
100 Ohms
Framing
D4 or ESF
Line Coding
LBO
AMI or B8ZS
0 - 655 feet
Clock
DCE, Internal
Front panel LEDs (1-7)
PWR, FAIL, TEST, STS 0, STS 1, INS, ALM
Data rates
n x 56Kbps or n x 64Kbps
(structured; n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24)
ATM support
CAS/CCS support with Dynamic bandwidth
reallocation
AAL1, AAL5
Looped, system
AAL5
Timing
Class of Service
T1-DSX/E1connector type
RJ48 or G703 coax with E1 Balun Adapter
T1-DSX/E1 connector pinouts
PIN 1 - Receive ring
PIN 2 - Receive Tip
PIN 3 -
PIN 4 - Transmit ring
PIN 5 - Transmit Tip
PIN 6 -
PIN 7 -
PIN 8 -
Frame Relay support
Compression Types
FRF.5, FRF.8
G.729A, G. 726, G.711, voice activity detection, fax
relay, DTMF relay
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Parts List
27
Options and Parts List
The tables below list available PathBuilder S330/S310 options. Contact 3Com or
your VAR with the appropriate part number for ordering and pricing information.
Table 6 PathBuilder S330 Part Numbers
Part Number
Description
3C63300A-AC-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI mmf,
and n x T1 WAN.
3C63300A-DC-NC
3C63303A-AC-NC
3C63303A-DC-NC
3C63304-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI mmf,
and n x T1 WAN
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI smf,
and n x T1 WAN
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI smf,
and n x T1 WAN
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI mmf,
and n x E1 WAN
3C63305-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI mmf,
and n x E1 WAN
3C63306-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI smf,
and n x E1 WAN
3C63307-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S330E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, OC3/STM-1 UNI smf,
and n x E1 WAN
3C63301
3C63308
Optional Four-Port CBR Module with three T1-DSX ports and one
V.35/RS-449 port
Optional Four-Port CBR Module with three E1 ports and one
V.35/RS-449 port
3C63311
3C63314
3C63313
3C63324
3C63325
Optional DS1 Voice Compression Module + 1 SIMM
Optional E1 Voice Compression Module + 1 SIMM
Voice Compression SIMM
Optional single-port DS3 Expansion Module
Optional single-port E3 Expansion Module
Table 7 PathBuilder S310 Part Numbers
Part Number
Description
3C63502A-NC
SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, and one T1 UNI.
3C63503A-NC
3C63508-NC
3C63509-NC
(continued)
SuperStack II PathBuilder S310 ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, and one T1 UNI.
SuperStack II PathBuilder S310E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with AC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, and one E1 UNI.
SuperStack II PathBuilder S310E ATM WAN Access Switch Base
System with DC Ethernet, V.35/RS-449 data, and one E1 UNI.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table 7 PathBuilder S310 Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number
Description
3C63504
Optional Two-Port CBR Module with one T1-DSX port and one
V.35/RS-449 port
3C63504
Optional Two-Port CBR Module with one E1 port and one
V.35/RS-449 port
3C63311
3C63314
3C63313
Optional DS1 Voice Compression Module + 1 SIMM
Optional E1 Voice Compression Module + 1 SIMM
Voice Compression SIMM
Table 8 Ancillary Items
Part Number
3C16071
Description
SuperStack II Advanced RPS Chassis only (eight slots)
SuperStack II Advanced RPS 100 W Module
3C16073
Table 9 Cables
Part Number
3C16079
3C63319
3C63905
3C63906
3C63907
3C63908
3C63909
3C63910
3C63913
Description
SuperStack II Advanced RPS Y-cable
V.35/RS-366 CBR Y -cable
Fiber cable; SC, multi-mode, to SC 8 m/25 ft.
Fiber cable; SC, multi-mode, to FC 8 m/25 ft.
Fiber cable; SC, multi-mode, to ST 8 m/25 ft.
Fiber cable; SC, single-mode, to SC 8 m/25 ft.
Fiber cable; SC, single-mode, to FC 8 m/25 ft.
Fiber cable; SC, single-mode, to ST 8 m/25 ft.
V.35 cable; HD 60-pin male to V.35 34-pin male, 2m / 6ft (crossover
DTE)
3C63914
3C63920
V.35 cable; HD 60-pin male to V.35 34-pin male, 2m / 6ft)
RS-449 cable; HD 60-pin male, straight, to RS-449 37-pin male,
2m/6ft
3C63921
3C63922
3C63923
RS-449 cable; HD 60-pin male, straight, to RS-449 37-pin female,
2m/6ft
EIA530 cable; HD 60-pin male, straight, to EIA530 25-pin male,
2m/6ft
EIA530 cable; HD 60-pin male, straight, to EIA530 25-pin female,
2m/6ft
3C63902
3C63903
3C63904
T1/E1 cable; RJ48, shielded straight, to RJ48, 8m/25ft
T1/E1 cable; RJ48, shielded crossover, to RJ48, 8m/25ft
E1 Balun Adapter; RJ48 120 ohm to Coax 75 ohm - 2M/6Ft
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
2
This chapter tells you how to mechanically and electrically install SuperStack® II
PathBuilder® S330 and SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches
(PathBuilder S330/S310) in your network and describes the PathBuilder S330/S310
ports and modules. It contains the following sections:
n
n
n
Before using this chapter for an actual installation, read through it at least once to
familiarize yourself with the overall process.
Receiving and
When you receive the PathBuilder S330/S310, do the following:
Inspecting the
PathBuilder S330/S310
1 Unpack and inspect the PathBuilder S330/S310 equipment for any damage that
might have occurred during shipment.
2 Inventory the equipment against the shipping notice.
3 Save the boxes and packing materials in the event there is damage or in case you
need to reship the unit at a future date.
4 If anything is damaged or missing, contact the shipper and 3Com immediately.
CAUTION: Many of the integrated circuits on the modules are sensitive to static
electricity. Do not remove the plug-in modules from their shelves without wearing
a properly-grounded antistatic wrist strap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Installation Overview
Figure 3 summarizes the overall installation procedure for the PathBuilder
S330/S310.
Figure 3 General Installation Procedure
Prepare the Site:
Verify clearance around the shelf site
Fabricate and run cabling and wiring
Step 1
Install the optional modules
(optional)
Step 2
Install the unit in the rack
Connect AC or DC power and
(optionally) the RPS system
Step 3
Step 4
Connect I/O cabling and wiring
Connect the management
terminal
Step 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Overview
31
Figure 4 shows an example of a PathBuilder S330 configuration with all of the
associated cabling connected.
Figure 4 PathBuilder S330 Full System Configuration
Video/Audio
Codec
PBX
PBX
V.35/
T1-DSX/E1
T1-DSX/E1
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
Network
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
V.35/
RS-232
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
n x T1/E1 IMA
10BASE-T
NMS Console
LAN
OC3/STM-1
Router
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 5 shows an example of a PathBuilder S310 with all of the associated cabling
connected.
Figure 5 PathBuilder S310 Full System Configuration
Video/Audio
Codec
PBX
PBX
V.35/
T1-DSX/E1
T1-DSX/E1
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
V.35/
RS-232
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
T1/E1
10BASE-T
NMS Console
LAN
Router
Site Requirements The operating site for the PathBuilder S330/S310 must meet the following
requirements:
n
Be within the maximum distances to the port and trunk connections, as well as
the NMS terminal
n
n
Have interconnect cabling and wiring ready and labeled
Have a dedicated source of switched and fused AC power or a primary DC
source.
n
n
Be within the operating environment for the PathBuilder S330/S310, as
Provide clearance for making all connections and performing maintenance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
33
Installation Procedures This section provides detailed instructions for completing the steps in the
installation procedure illustrated earlier in Figure 3.
Step 1 (Optional): Install This section tells you how to install the optional modules in the PathBuilder
the Optional Modules in S330/S310 chassis.
the Unit
The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports three optional modules:
n
CBR module—a board consisting of one V.35/RS-366/RS-449/RS-530/X.21
interface and three T1-DSX or E1 interfaces (one T1-DSX or E1 interface for the
PathBuilder S310). It services traffic generated by your existing PBXs, channels,
T1/E1 multiplexers, CSU/DSUs, and video conferencing devices. Install the CBR
module in expansion slot 7. Figure 6 shows the CBR module connections.
Figure 6 CBR Module Connections
Video/Audio
Codec
PBX
V.35/
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
T1-DSX/E1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
n
Voice compression module—a board consisting of one T1-DSX or E1
interface. It services traffic generated by your existing PBXs, channels, T1/E1
multiplexers, CSU/DSUs, and video conferencing devices. Install the Voice
Compression module in slot 7 or slot 8. Figure 7 shows the VCM module
connections.
Figure 7 Voice Compression Module Connections
PBX
T1-DSX/E1
n
DS3/E3 module—a board consisting of one DS3 or E3 port. It is typically used
for terminating/accessing the public or private ATM WAN services. However,
depending on your local applications, you can also use the DS3/E3 module for
taking local DS3 or E3 ATM traffic across the WAN. Install the DS3/E3 module
in expansion slot 9. Figure 8 shows the DS3/E3 module connections.
Figure 8 DS3/E3 Module Connections
Network
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
35
Installing the Optional Modules in the Unit
To install an option module in the unit, follow these steps:
CAUTION: Many of the integrated circuits on the modules are sensitive to static
electricity. When installing plug-in modules, always wear a properly-grounded
anti-static wrist strap.
1 Turn off the power and unplug the unit.
2 Open the unit.
a Remove the eight screws (three on each side and two in the rear), as shown in
Figure 9 Removing the Eight Screws from the PathBuilder S330/S310 Unit
b Push the cover back (arrow 1) and lift it up from the rear (arrow 2), as shown in
Figure 10 Removing the PathBuilder S330/S310 Cover
2
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
3 Remove the cover plate from the slot into which you want to install the optional
screws being removed from slot 7.
Figure 11 Removing the Cover Plate from Slot 7
4 Insert the optional card into the appropriate slot (7 for the CBR module; 7 or 8 for
the VCM; 9 for the DS3/E3 module). Figure 12 shows the CBR module being
installed into slot 7. Installation for the other modules is the same.
Figure 12 Inserting an Optional Module (CBR Module into Slot 7)
3
4
2
a Slide the faceplate into position (arrow 1).
b Line up the pins carefully and press down from above the pin connector (arrow
2).
By aligning the screw hole with the standoff, you will also line up the pins.
c Install the screw supplied with the optional module through the card into the
stand-off post (item 3).
d Install the two screws in the optional module’s faceplate (item 4).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
37
5 Replace the unit’s cover.
a Slide the cover back into place so that the five tabs go under the lip of the front
panel (arrow 1) and push it down at the rear (arrow 2), as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13 Replacing the PathBuilder S330/S310 Cover
2
1
b Secure the cover with the eight assembly screws you removed in step 1a.
Step 2: Install the Unit in In a normal rack mount configuration the PathBuilder S330/S310 shelf is 3.5" x
the Rack 17" x 15.5" including cables. Since the equipment is cooled with two internal
fans, clearance at the top is not needed; however, convection cooled equipment
must not be mounted directly under the shelf.Allow at least one rack unit
mounted in an enclosure, plan on enough clearance at the front for cable and
wiring service loops.
CAUTION: Many of the integrated circuits on the modules are sensitive to static
electricity. Do not handle the plug-in modules without wearing a properly
grounded antistatic, wrist strap. When removing the modules from the shelf,
place them printed-circuit side down on a nonconducting, static-free, flat surface.
To mount the shelf, follow these steps:
1 Attach the rack-mount ears to the unit, following the instructions supplied with
the ears.
CAUTION: When attaching the rack-mount ears, you must use the
factory-supplied screws. Using screws other than those supplied with the
rack-mount ears voids your warranty and could damage the PCB.
CAUTION: Do not block the ventilation openings on the top and bottom of the
unit during installation. A minimum of 1 rack unit (1.75”) space is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 14 Rack Mounting Ear Configuration
19"
PathBuilder S330/S310
!
Caution:
One rack unit space
required above
and below the
2 Rows
3.5"
unit for clearance.
(mounting brackets required)
3 Support the shelf in its mounting place and attach the mounting hardware.
Step 3: Connect AC or You connect the AC/DC power at the rear of the PathBuilder S330/S310 shelf.
(optionally) the RPS
Table 10 AC/DC Source Specifications
System
Input Power
Requirements
90-264 VAC, 50-60Hz, standard grounded
outlet
-42 to -60 VDC, Optional
AC: 14 AWG wire, Belden type 19364
DC: minimum 14 AWG wire, listed type
TC tray cable with three conductors
Power Consumption
Maximum Current
60 Watts typical, 90 Watts maximum
1.5 A @ 110VAC
0.75A @ 220VAC
3A @ 48VDC
To connect AC or DC power, follow these steps:
WARNING: Before handling AC/DC power leads, disconnect all power supply
cords and always have a partner close by who is familiar with first aid for electrical
shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
39
CAUTION: CENTRALIZED 48VDC UNITS -To be installed only in Restricted Access
Areas (dedicated equipment rooms, equipment closets, etc.) in accordance with
Articles 110-16 or 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA
No.70.
1 Turn off the AC/DC power source and connect the AC/DC leads to the front of the
shelf. Dress the leads to the rack, leaving a service loop.
2 Turn on AC/DC power and verify that the POWER indicator on the power supply is
power application.
Figure 15 Shelf Fill for AC/DC Power Application
AC Units Only:
AC Power Connector / Fuse Holder
Redundant Power Supply (RPS) Connector
Vent
Vent
DC Units Only:
DC Power Connector
+
GND
Installing the Optional RPS System
The PathBuilder S330/S310 also supports the SuperStack II Redundant Power
3Com RPS, option 3C16073, to this socket. For details, follow the installation
instructions in the guide accompanying the RPS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 16 SuperStack II RPS Power Supply Socket and Fuse
Spare fuse holder
Fuse
AC Power
The PathBuilder S330/S310 automatically adjusts to the supply voltage. The fuse is
suitable for both 110V AC and 220-240V AC operations.
To change the fuse, follow these steps:
1 Turn of the power and unplug the unit.
CAUTION: Ensure that the power cord is disconnected before opening the fuse
holder cover.
2 Release the fuse holder by gently levering a small screwdriver under the fuse
holder catch. Use only 2A anti-surge type fuses of the same type and manufacture
as the original.
3 Remove the old fuse and replace it with a new one.
4 Close the fuse holder.
Step 4: Connect I/O The PathBuilder S330/S310 ships with the standard interfaces installed. Unless you
Cabling have purchased optional modules, you do not need to install any additional
modules. For details about how to install the optional CBR, voice compression,
and DS3/E3 UNI modules, see “Step 1 (Optional): Install the Optional Modules in
The following LEDs indicate the status of the PathBuilder S330/S310 as a whole.
Power (green)—Illuminates when the unit is turned on.
Status (green)—Illuminates when the CPU completes downloading and flashes
in normal state.
Alert (red)—Illuminates when a major alarm is detected in the unit. See
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
41
Figure 17 PathBuilder S330/S310 Common LEDs
Alert
Status
Power
Figure 18 shows the port configuration of a PathBuilder S330/S310.
Figure 18 PathBuilder S330/S310 Ports and CBR Module
Optional voice compression module
installed in expansion slot 8
CBR module T1-DSX or E1 ports
(only 1 port for PathBuilder S310)
VCM T1-DSX or E1 port
Optional DS3 or E3 module
CBR (V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21)
serial port
installed in expansion slot 9
(PathBuilder S330 only)
Optional CBR module
installed in expansion slot 7
DS3 or E3 port
RS-232 (console) port
Ethernet port
T1/n x T1 or E1/n x E1 interface
(one T1 or E1 for PathBuilder S310)
OC3/STM-1 port (PathBuilder S330 only)
Serial (V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21) port
The following sections tell you how to make connections to the ports of the
PathBuilder S330/S310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Connecting to the T1/E1 UNI Interface
As shown above in Figure 18, the PathBuilder S330 T1/E1 UNI with IMA interface
provides four T1/E1 ports. You can connect a single T1/E1 line to this interface, or
connect up to four T1/E1 lines and combine them to form a logical,
inverse-multiplexed high-speed link. See “Configuring UNI and IMA Groups” in
If you are using a G703 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the
interface, you must use the E1 Balun Adapter (part number 3C63904).
T1/E1 UNI Interface LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in
this chapter, the following LEDs indicate the status of each T1/E1 port. (See
The PathBuilder S330 has four of each of the following LEDs (one for each T1/E1
port). The PathBuilder S310 has one of each of the following LEDs (for its one
T1/E1 port).
ALARM PORT #N (red)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when an
alarm condition is detected on the corresponding T1/E1 line.
ONLINE PORT #N (green)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when
status of the T1/E1 ports and/or IMA groups.
Figure 19 PathBuilder S330 T1/E1 UNI LEDs
NOTE: The PathBuilder S310
has only one set of functioning LEDs
1 2 3 4
Alarm
Online
Connecting to the Serial Port
To connect to the serial port, connect a DTE or DCE cable to the MOLEX 60-pin
connector on the front of the unit. The cable options for the serial port are:
n
n
n
n
DCE V.35—The connector type on the V.35 cable converter is 35-pin
Winchester; female.
DTE/DCE RS-449—The connector type at the end of the RS-449 cable is DB-37
subminiature; female for DCE, male for DTE.
DTE/DCE EIA530—The connector type at the end of the EIA530 cable is DB-25
subminiature; female for DCE, male for DTE.
DTE/DCE X.21—The connector type at the end of the X.21 cable is DB-15
subminiature; female for DCE, male for DTE.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
43
The following tables describe the serial port connector pinouts.
Note that PathBuilder S330/S310 cables are compatible with CISCO cables, except
for the DCE EIA530 which CISCO does not manufacture.
Table 11 Connector Pinouts for V.35 DTE Cable (60-pin connector) to V.35 Male
Pin # on 60- pin Pin # onV.35
Direction (for
Serial Port)
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
46
A
B
45
42
C
D
E
Out
In
CTS
35
DSR
34
In
DCD
33
F
In
DTR
43
H
K
P
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
LL (not used)
SD+
44
18
SD-
17
S
RD+
28
R
RD-
27
T
In
SCTE+
20
U
W
V
X
Y
AA
Out
Out
In
SCTE-
19
SCR+
26
SCR-
25
In
SCT+
24
In
SCT-
23
In
Shorting GR 1
Shorting GR 2
Shorting GR 3
48, 49
50, 51, 52
53, 54, 55, 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Table 12 Connector Pinouts for V.35 DCE Cable (60-pin Connector) to V.35 Female
Pin # on 60- pin Pin # on V.35
Direction (for
Serial Port)
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
46
A
B
45
35
C
D
E
In
CTS
42
Out
Out
Out
In
DSR
43
DCD
44
F
DTR
34
H
K
P
LL (not used)
SD+
33
In
28
In
SD-
27
S
In
RD+
18
R
Out
Out
In
RD-
17
T
SCTE+
26
U
W
V
X
Y
AA
SCTE-
25
In
SCR+
22
Out
Out
Out
Out
SCR-
21
SCT+
20
SCT-
19
Shorting GR 1
Shorting GR 2
Shorting GR 3
48, 49
50, 51,
53, 54, 55, 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
45
Table 13 Connector Pinouts for RS-449 DTE Cable (60-pin connector) to DB-37 Male
Pin # on 60-pin Pin # on DB-37 Direction (for
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
Serial Port)
46
1
15, 16, 45
9, 10
19, 20, 37
7, 25
Out
In
CTS
1, 2
9, 27
DSR
3, 4
11, 29
13, 31
In
DCD (not used, see
DCE cable)
5, 6
In
DTR
7, 8
44
12, 30
10
4
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
LL (not used)
SD+
11
SD-
12
22
6
RD+
28
RD-
27
24
17
35
8
In
SCTE+
SCTE-
13
Out
Out
In
14
SCR+
26
SCR-
25
26
5
In
SCT+
24
In
SCT-
23
23
In
Shorting GR 1
Shorting GR 2
48, 49
51, 52,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Table 14 Connector Pinouts for RS-449 DCE Cable (60-pin Connector) to DB-37 Female
Pin # on DB-37
Pin # on 60-pin
Connector
Direction (for
Serial Port)
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
46
1
15, 16, 30
1, 2
9, 10
7, 8
5, 6
3, 4
29
19, 20, 37
7, 25
9, 27
11, 29
13, 31
12, 30
10
In
CTS
Out
Out
Out
In
DSR
DCD
DTR
LL (not used)
SD+
In
28
4
In
SD-
27
22
In
RD+
11
6
Out
Out
In
RD-
12
24
SCTE+
SCTE-
26
17
25
35
In
SCR+
24
8
Out
Out
Out
Out
SCR-
23
26
SCT+
13
5
SCT-
14
23
Shorting GR 1
48, 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
47
Table 15 Connector Pinouts for EIA530 DTE cable (60-pin Connector) to DB-25 Male
Pin # on 60-pin Pin # on DB-25 Direction (for
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
Serial Port)
46
1
45
7
9, 10
1, 2
4, 19
5, 13
6, 22
8, 10
Out
In
CTS
DSR
3, 4
In
DCD (not used, see
DCE cable)
5, 6
In
DTR
7, 8
44
20, 23
18
2
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
LL (not used)
SD+
11
SD-
12
14
3
RD+
28
RD-
27
16
24
11
17
9
In
SCTE+
SCTE-
13
Out
Out
In
14
SCR+
26
SCR-
25
In
SCT+
24
15
12
In
SCT-
23
In
Shorting GR 1
Shorting GR 2
47, 48, 49
51, 52,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Table 16 Connector Pinouts for EIA530 DCE cable (60-pin Connector) to DB-25 Female
Pin # on 60-pin Pin # on DB-25 Direction (for
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
Serial Port)
46
1
45
7
1, 2
4, 19
5, 13
6, 22
8, 10
In
CTS
9, 10
7, 8
Out
Out
Out
DSR
DCD (not used, see
DCE cable)
5, 6
DTR
3, 4
29
20, 23
18
2
In
LL (not used)
SD+
In
28
In
SD-
27
14
3
In
RD+
11
Out
Out
In
RD-
12
16
24
11
17
9
SCTE+
SCTE-
SCR+
26
25
In
24
Out
Out
Out
Out
SCR-
23
SCT+
13
15
12
SCT-
14
Shorting GR 1
47, 48, 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
49
Table 17 Connector Pinouts for X.21 DTE cable (60-pin Connector) to DB-15 Male
Pin # on 60-pin Pin # on DB-25 Direction (for
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
Serial Port)
46
1
15
8
9, 10
1, 2
3, 10
5, 12
Out
In
CTS
DSR
In
DCD (not used, see
DCE cable)
In
DTR
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
LL (not used)
SD+
11
12
28
27
2
SD-
9
RD+
4
RD-
11
In
SCTE+
SCTE-
Out
Out
In
SCR+
26
25
6
SCR-
13
In
SCT+
In
SCT-
In
Shorting GR 1
Shorting GR 2
47, 48
51, 52,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Table 18 Connector Pinouts for X.21 DCE cable (60-pin Connector) to DB-15 Female
Pin # on 60-pin Pin # on DB-25 Direction (for
Signal Name
Frame GND
Circuit GND
RTS
Connector
Connector
Serial Port)
46
1
15
8
1, 2
3, 10
5, 12
In
CTS
9, 10
Out
Out
Out
DSR
DCD (DCD should be
tristated when in DTE
mode)
DTR
In
LL (not used)
SD+
In
28
27
11
12
2
In
SD-
9
In
RD+
4
Out
Out
In
RD-
11
SCTE+
SCTE-
In
SCR+ (SCR+ and -
should be tristated
when in DTE mode,
double term., double
buffer)
24
6
Out
SCR-
23
13
Out
Out
Out
SCT+
SCT-
Shorting GR 1
47, 48
Serial Port LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this
RD active (green)—Flashes with receiving signals.
TD active (green)—Flashes with transmitting signals.
Figure 20 PathBuilder S330/S310 Serial Port LEDs
TD
RD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
51
Connecting to the Ethernet Port
To connect to the Ethernet port, run a cable from the port to the LAN. The Link
LED illuminates if you make the connection properly. The cable run from the
PathBuilder S330/S310 Ethernet port to the Ethernet LAN connection must be no
longer than 100 meters, in compliance with EIA/TIA standards for 10BaseT. This
cable length should include service loops at the ends and the complete cable route
distances.
Ethernet Port LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this
TX data (green)—Indicates transmit (to the cable) activity. The LED flashes
momentarily for each frame sent to the cable.
RX data (green)—Indicates receive (from the cable) activity. The LED flashes
momentarily for each frame received from the cable.
Link (green)—Indicates that you have a link to the remote system. If this LED is
off, then a problem exisits with the remote link. For example, the Ethernet cable
may not be connected properly, or the remote Ethernet unit may be down.
Figure 21 PathBuilder S330/S310 Ethernet Port LEDs
Link
RX data
TX data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Connecting to the OC3/STM-1 Port
S330 only The OC3/STM-1 UNI port is equipped with an internal SC-type connector
supporting the use of multi-mode or single-mode fiber optic cable, as shown in
Figure 22 OC3/STM-1 UNI (Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cable)
Figure 23 OC3/STM-1 UNI (Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable)
Public ATM Service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
53
OC3/STM-1 LEDs In addition to the common LEDs described earlier in this
chapter, the following LEDs indicate the status of the OC3/STM-1 port. (See
OC3/STM-1 Alert (red)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF), Loss of Pointer (LOP), or Loss of ATM
Frame (LOAF) condition is detected on the incoming OC3/STM-1. If none of these
conditions is present, the OC3/STM-1 ALARM LED is off.
OC3/STM-1 Active (green)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when
the OC3/STM-1 is online.
Figure 24 OC3/STM-1 Port LEDs
Alert
Active
Connecting to the CBR Module
The CBR module provides an RJ48 DSX interface for T1-DSX/E1 traffic. Line Build
Outs (LBOs) to DSX of up to 655 feet are supported. You must configure the LBOs
without DSU/CSUs, as long as the equipment supports a direct T1-DSX/E1
pinouts.
Table 19 CBR T1-DSX/E1 Pinouts
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
RX (ring)
RX (tip)
NC
TX (ring)
TX (tip)
NC
NC
NC
If you are using a G703 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the
interface, you must use the E1 Balun Adapter (part number 3C63904).
The serial port of the PathBuilder S330/S310 CBR module has two types of
interface: V.35 for video data and RS-366 for video dial. These interfaces are
broken out from a 50-pin connector on the S330/S310 via a Y cable. Use the
V.35/RS-366 serial CBR connector to connect directly to H.320 video codec devices
such as PictureTel, Vtel, and CLI.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Table 20 CBR V.35/RS-366 Connector Pinouts
Connector type at end of
V.35/RS-366 cable
DB-25 subminiature,
female for DCE
From
J1-46
J1-45
J1-35
J1-42
J1-43
J1-44
J1-34
J1-33
J1-28
J1-27
J1-18
J1-17
J1-26
J1-25
J1-22
J1-21
J1-20
J1-19
J1-50
J1-29
J1-31
J1-32
J1-36
J1-37
J1-38
J1-39
J1-40
J1-41
J1-47
J1-59
J1-56
To
J2-A
J2-B
J2-C
J2-D
J2-E
Connector pinouts
Frame Ground
Circuit Ground
RTS
CTS
DSR
DCD
J2-F
DTR
J2-H
J2-K
J2-P
LL
SD+
SD-
J2-S
RD+
J2-R
J2-T
RD-
SCTE+
J2-U
J2-W
J2-V
J2-X
J2-Y
J2-AA
J2-J
SCTE-
SCR+
SCR-
SCT+
SCT-
366_RI
366_PWI
366_ACR
366_PND
366_DSC
366_DLO
366_NB1
366_NB2
366_NB4
366_NB8
366_CRQ
366_DPR
Signal Ground
SHT GRP 1
J3-6
J3-3
J3-5
J3-13
J3-22
J3-14
J3-15
J3-16
J3-17
J3-4
J3-2
J3-7
J1-49
J1-48
2
2
SHT GRP 2
SHT GRP 3
J1-50
J1-51
J1-53
J1-54
J1-55
J1-56
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
55
CBR Module LEDs The CBR module features the following front panel
indicators:
Inservice (green)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when you set the
administrative status of the T1-DSX/E1 or serial port to In Service. See
administrative status of the ports on the CBR module.
ALARM (red)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when an alarm
condition is detected on the corresponding T1-DSX/E1 or V.35 line.
Figure 25 PathBuilder S330 CBR Module LEDs
Alarm
Inservice
T1-DSX/E1 ports
Serial (RS-366
and V.35/RS-449/
RS-530/X.21) port
Connecting to the Voice Compression Module
The Voice Compression module provides an RJ48 DSX interface for T1-DSX/E1
traffic. Line Build Outs (LBOs) to DSX of up to 655 feet are supported. You must
configure the LBOs in the VCM Port Configuration Menu. See “Configuring the
connections to DTE equipment without DSU/CSUs, as long as the equipment
supports a direct T1-DSX/E1 interface and can recover a T1-DSX/E1 signal.
Table 21 VCM T1-DSX/E1 Pinouts
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
RX (ring)
RX (tip)
NC
TX (ring)
TX (tip)
NC
NC
NC
If you are using a G703 coax physical connection to connect the E1 line to the
interface, you must use the E1 Balun Adapter (part number 3C63904).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
The Voice Compression module features the following front panel indicators, as
PWR—Illuminates when the VCM is receiving power.
FAIL—Illuminates when the VCM card fails.
TEST—Illuminates during powerup, as internal diagnostics are being performed
and during loopbacks.
STS 0 (Status 0)—Blinks green during normal operation.
STS 1 (Status 1)—Illuminates when the VCM port is in service.
INS—Illuminates when the VCM card is in service.
ALM—Illuminates when there is an alarm present on the VCM card.
Figure 26 Voice Compression Module LEDS
ALM
INS
STS 1
STS 0
TEST
FAIL
PWR
Connecting to the DS3/E3 Module
S330 only Connect the DS3/E3 module to a DS3 repeater using the female BNC connectors.
The maximum coax run is 450 feet. The transmitter in the DS3 UNI Module
includes selectable LBO (Line Build-Out) to adjust the output signal to cable runs of
0-255 or 225-450 feet. Select the LBO during card configuration from the local
details.
The DS3/E3 UNI module features the following front panel indicators, as illustrated
INS—Illuminates when the DS3/E3 card is in service.
ALM—Illuminates when an alarm is present on the DS3 card.
LOS (RED)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when a LOS (Loss of
Signal) condition is detected on the incoming DS3. The LOS LED is off if a signal is
present. It reflects the LOS state of the DS3 in real time (no integration of the state
is needed).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
57
LOF (RED)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when a LOF (Loss of
Frame) condition is detected on the incoming DS3. The LOF LED is off when the
signal is in frame. It reflects the LOF state of the DS3 in real time (no integration of
the state is needed).
LOCD (RED)—Powers up in the “off” state and illuminates when a LOCD (Loss of
Cell Delineation) condition is detected on the incoming DS3 under HEC (Header
Error Control) framing. The LOCD LED is off when delineations are obtained. It
reflects the LOCD state of the DS3 in real time (no integration of the state is
needed).
Figure 27 DS3 UNI Module LEDs
LOCD
LOF
LOS
ALM
INS
The DS3/E3 UNI shares the same queue (Queue 1) as the Group 1 IMA UNI;
therefore, if a DS3/E3 expansion card is installed in slot 9, the system deletes
Group 1 and all corresponding VCs on startup and generates an information only
alarm. Furthermore, you cannot add Group 1 if a DS3/E3 expansion card is
installed—either in the chassis or in the database. If you change the card type for
slot 9 to DS3/E3 via the List Card menu, Group 1 and the corresponding VCs are
not deleted until the system is restarted.
Step 5: Connect the In order to configure application connections and an IP address for SNMP support,
Management Terminal you must connect a management terminal to the PathBuilder S330/S310. To do
this, follow these steps:
1 Connect a VT 100 terminal to the RS-232 (console) port on the front of the
PathBuilder S330/S310.
2 Use the VT100 terminal to input an IP address for the PathBuilder S330/S310. See
3 Establish communication between the PathBuilder S330/S310 and any
management terminal in one of these ways:
n
Direct RS-232 using the VT100 terminal or VT100 emulator, as described above
Direct 10BaseT on the Management CPU card using an IP Telnet session
n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETTING STARTED
3
This chapter tells you how to initialize and prepare SuperStack® II PathBuilder®
S330 and SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches (PathBuilder
S330/S310) for operation and how to use the PathBuilder S330/S310 menus. It
contains the following sections:
n
n
n
n
n
Logging On
You enter initial configuration information via the local user interface. This
interface is presented on a VT100 terminal connected to the RS-232 (console) port
on the front of the PathBuilder S330/S310, as shown in Figure 29. See Chapter 2
for details about connecting the VT100 terminal.
Set the terminal for the following:
n
n
n
n
9600 baud
no parity
8 data bits
1 stop bit
Figure 29 NMS Terminal Connection Options
10BASE-T
RS-232
LAN
VT-100
NMS Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
When the PathBuilder S330/S310 is powered up and operating, and your terminal
is connected, operating, and properly configured, the title screen shown in
Figure 30 NMS PathBuilder S330/S310 Title Screen
The Title screen identifies the interface and its software release number and
prompts you for a password. Enter the default password (in all lowercase letters):
password
If the software does not accept your password entry, try again. If the password still
is not accepted, check with your system administrator to obtain the correct
password.
The Main menu, shown in Figure 31, appears.
Figure 31 PathBuilder S330/S310 Main Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Menus
61
Use the options on the Main menu as follows:
n
Select [1] System Administration to access common parameters.
n
Select [2] Configuration Management to view or set configuration parameters
for cards, ports, PVCs, video dialup, and other hardware and software features.
n
Select [3] Fault Management to view or acknowledge alarms and set
loopbacks.
n
n
Select [4] Performance Management to view statistical data.
Select [5] Exit to log out.
Using the Menus
The title of the menu or display appears at the top of the screen. Your access
status appears in the upper righthand corner.
n
Read-Write means that you have Read-Write control of the PathBuilder
S330/S310 and can make changes to the system.
n
Read Only means that you can only monitor the menus and displays.
Only one Read/Write session is allowed at any given time. The first session is the
Read/Write session. Subsequent simultaneous sessions are Read Only.
Navigating through the You select a menu option by typing the selection number and pressing [Enter].
Menus
Displays that contain information and no selections include the prompt:
Press Esc for previous menu
Multi-page displays also prompt you to press “N” for the next page or “P” for the
previous page.
Only the Main menu contains the Exit selection to log out. Selecting Exit returns
you to the title screen with the password prompt. All other menus have a Previous
menu selection which returns you to the Main menu one screen at a time. You can
also press [Esc] to move back one menu at a time.
The auto logout feature automatically logs you out and returns you to the title
screen if you do not press a key for a specified time (1 - 99 minutes). To set the
autolog timeout, select [1] System Administration from the Main menu, then
select [1] General System Information, then select [6] Set Auto Logout Time.
Always return to the Main Menu to log out or let the auto logout time expire.
Exiting the program in any other way, such as turning power off to the network
management station, may cause unpredictable results.
Understanding the The PathBuilder S330/S310 menu hierarchy includes several layers of menus. Each
Menu Hierarchy submenu has a name that is the same or similar to the name of the option that
displays it. For example, selecting [2] Configuration Management on the Main
Menu displays a submenu titled Configuration Management, and selecting [4]
Manage System Clock from the System Administration menu displays a submenu
titled System Clock Configuration. You can then select options on the submenus
to display additional submenus or prompts that allow you to set various
parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
Using the Menus to Settings are displayed in prompts at the bottom of the menus. For example, if you
Change Settings select
[2] Configuration Management
[1] Manage Card
[4] OC3/STM-1 UNI
[3] Set ATM Payload Scramble
The following prompt appears at the bottom of the SONET/STM-1 UNI
Configuration menu:
Enter ATM Payload Scramble (1=No,2=Yes):
When you type a selection number and press [Enter], payload scrambling is
disabled or enabled and the prompt is cleared.
Alarm Indicator If the PathBuilder S330/S310 detects an alarm condition, an alarm indicator (the
highlighted word “Alarm”) appears to the left of the access status on every menu
Figure 32 Alarm Indicator
indicates that an alarm condition
has been detected
After you acknowledge the alarm, the alarm indicator is no longer highlighted, but
the word “Alarm” remains in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that
an alarm has been acknowledged.
When the alarm is acknowledged and the condition that caused the alarm is
cleared, the indicator disappears entirely. If a menu indicates that an alarm has
been acknowledged and a new alarm occurs, the Alarm indicator is highlighted
again.
alarms.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Initial System Configuration
63
Performing Initial
System Configuration
After you install the PathBuilder S330/S310 hardware, you must complete the
following three steps in order to put the unit into operation:
1 Configure the system clock
2 Set up communication parameters
3 Set the time and date
4 Set up passwords
You access the menus used to perform these steps from the System
menu:
From the Main menu, select [1] System Administration.
Figure 33 System Administration Menu
The following subsections provide instructions for performing the four initial
PathBuilder S330/S310 ports and modules.
Configuring the System By default, the PathBuilder S330/S310 uses the internal clock as its reference
Clock clock. You can specify up to eight additional clocks for the system to use as a
reference clock. When you set the clocks, you also assign each one a priority. You
can then set the system clock to the clock with the highest priority. If this clock
fails, the system automatically uses the clock with the next highest priority as its
reference clock. It defaults to the internal clock only if all eight clocks fail or if
there are no more valid selections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
To set system clocks, follow these steps:
1 From the System Administration menu, select [4] Manage System Clock to display
the System Clock Configuration menu, shown in Figure 34.
Figure 34 System Clock Configuration Menu
2 Select [3] Set PriorityClock 1 to specify the clock which you want to designate as
the priority 1 (highest priority) clock.
3 Enter the option number corresponding to the clock you want to designate as the
priority 1 system clock. The clock options correspond to the available ports.
If you are configuring a PathBuilder S310, do not select unavailable ports (ports
2-4, CBR ports 2 and 3, and OC3/STM-1) as system clocks—even though the
software lists these ports and allows you to select them.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to designate up to seven additional clocks as the priority 2
through 8 clocks, substituting the appropriate option in step 2. For example, to
designate the priority 2 clock, select [4] Set PriorityClock 2.
5 Select [11] Set System Clock to Highest PriorityClock to set the system clock to the
clock you designated as the priority 1 clock in step 3 above. If this clock fails, the
PathBuilder S330/S310 will automatically use the clock with the next highest
priority as its reference clock.
Setting up In order for the PathBuilder S330/S310 to communicate to the Ethernet network,
Communication you must set the correct communication parameters. To do this, select [3] Manage
Parameters IP Network Configuration From the System Administration menu, to display the
following:
n
n
n
Local host IP address
Trap client
Default gateway
The subsections following the figure describe how to set these parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Initial System Configuration
65
Figure 35 Manage IP Network Configuration Menu
Configuring the Local Host IP Address
In order for the PathBuilder S330/S310 to communicate on the network, you must
use the VT100 terminal to assign an IP address to the device. Once you have
entered the IP address for the PathBuilder S330/S310 on the VT100 terminal, you
can continue configuring the device on the local console, or you can use a Telnet
session to configure the device on a TCP/IP workstation.
To enter an IP address for the PathBuilder S330/S310, follow these steps:
1 From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu, select [1] Local Host IP
Configuration to display the Local Host IP Configuration menu, shown in
When you apply a change to this menu, you might get logged out if you are using
a Telnet session. The default VT100 configuration is Baud rate: 9600, Parity; none,
Data Bits:8, StopBits:1.
Figure 36 Local Host IP Configuration Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
2 Select [1] Ethernet Port IP Configuration to display the Ethernet Port IP
Configuration menu, shown in Figure 37.
Figure 37 Ethernet Port IP Configuration Menu
3 Enter the following information (by selecting the appropriate options and
responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen) to enable IP
Ethernet connectors:
IP Address—Provided by the network administrator. This is the IP address of the
PathBuilder S330/S310 Management CPU.
You should consult the network administrator to obtain an IP Address for the
PathBuilder S330/S310 which will allow its 10BaseT Management port to co-exist
with hosts on its local LAN.
Subnet Mask—Provided by the network administrator.
Community Name—Enter private(The community name applies to the SNMP
SET operation.)
Figure 38 Sample PathBuilder S330/S310 IP Host Setup
PathBuilder
S330/S310
192.73.30.99
192.73.30.100
3Com
Community
4 Select [4] Previous menu to return to the Local Host IP Configuration menu.
5 Select [2] Apply IP Configuration Changes to activate the IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Initial System Configuration
67
The IP address does not take effect until you apply your changes by selecting
[2] Apply IP Configuration Changes from the Local Host IP Configuration menu
(step 5 above).
Configuring Trap Clients
Trap clients are the network management stations to which you want the
PathBuilder S330/S310 to send traps. You can specify up to four trap clients. To
configure trap clients, follow these steps:
1 From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu, select [2] Trap Client
Figure 39 Trap Client Configuration Menu
2 Select the number corresponding to the trap client you want to configure.
Figure 40 shows the menu for configuring trap client 1.
Figure 40 Trap Client 1 Configuration Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
3 Enter the following information (by selecting the appropriate options and
responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen) to configure
the trap client:
IP Address—The IP address of the network management station to which you
want the PathBuilder S330/S310 to send traps.
Subnet Mask—The subnet mask for the network management station to which
you want the PathBuilder S330/S310 to send traps.
Port Number—The system-defined port number. You should not modify this
number. (SNMP/UDP).
4 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the Trap Client Configuration menu.
5 Select [5] Previous Menu to return to the Manage IP Network Configuration menu.
Configuring the Default Gateway
The default gateway routes IP data to non-local networks (Telnet sessions from
different subnetworks). To configure the default gateway, follow these steps:
1 From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu, select [3] Default Gateway
Configuration to display the Default Gateway Configuration menu, shown in
2 Enter the following information (by selecting the appropriate options and
responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen) to configure
the default gateway:
IP Address—The IP address of the router which you want to configure as the
default gateway.
Subnet Mask—The subnet mask for the router which you want to configure as
the default gateway.
Figure 41 Default Gateway Configuration Menu
3 Select [3] Previous Menu to return to the Manage IP Network Configuration menu.
4 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Initial System Configuration
69
Setting the Time and To set the time and date, follow these steps:
Date
It is important to set the time and date accurately because these settings provide
the timestamp for alarms.
1 From the System Administration menu, select [2] Manage Time and Date to
display the Time and Date Configuration menu, shown in Figure 42.
Figure 42 Time and Date Configuration Menu
2 Select [1] Set Date. The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Enter Date (mm/dd/yy)
3 Enter the date.
4 Select [2] Set Time. The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Enter Time (hh:mm:ss):
5 Enter the time.
6 Select [3] Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu.
7 Select [11] Previous Menu to return to the Main menu.
Setting up Passwords The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports a total of up to 10 logins at the following
three access levels:
Read-Only User—Can view information and configuration settings in the
PathBuilder S330/S310 interface, but cannot set parameters or make any changes.
Read-Write User—Can view and set/change configuration information.
Super User—Can view and set/change configuration information and can
perform the following super user functions:
n
n
n
Set passwords
Take over a read-write session
Erase the system database
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
This section tells you how to set passwords. For details about how to take over
read-write sessions and how to erase the system database, see “Performing
The default password for all three access levels is password. This password logs
you on initially as a super user. For security reasons, you should change the Super
User, Read-Write, and Read-Only passwords as soon as possible.
To set the Super User, Read-Write, or Read-Only password, follow these steps:
1 From the System Administration menu, select [13] Super User Privilege to open the
Super User Privilege menu, shown Figure 43.
Figure 43 Super User Privilege Menu
2 Select [1] Set System Login Password to open the System Login Password menu,
Figure 44 System Login Password Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Additional Super User Functions
71
3 Select [1] Set Super User Password, [2] Set Read-Write Password, or [3] Set
Read-Only Password to set the desired password.
The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Enter New Password:
4 Enter the new password. The password appears as asterisks on the screen as you
enter it.
CAUTION: Be sure to record your new password and keep the record in a safe
place. If you forget your password and have no record of it, you can contact 3Com
for assistance, but we may need to delete your database in order to solve the
problem.
The following prompt appears:
Re-enter New Password:
5 Re-enter the password you entered in step 4.
A message appears, indicating that the password has been saved.
6 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the Super User Privilege menu.
Performing Additional
Super User Functions
In addition to setting passwords, you can also take over read-write sessions and
erase the system database from the Super User Privilege menu, shown earlier in
Taking over a The PathBuilder S330S310 allows only one read-write session at a time. If you
Read-Write Session have super user privileges, however, you can take over a read-write session
without logging off. When you take over a read-write session, the previous
read-write session is forced to a read-only session.
To take over a read-write session, follow these steps:
Over Read-Write Session.
The following prompt appears:
Do you want to take over read-write session (Y/N) [N]?
2 Enter y to take over the read-write session.
The following message appears:
The current session has been changed to Read-Write!
Press any key to return.
3 Press any key to resume your session in read-write mode.
The interface for the user whose read-write session you took over will switch to
read-only mode the next time that user changes screens.
Erasing the System In certain situations—if anomalous behavior on the part of the PathBuilder
Database S330/S310 makes you suspect that the database has been corrupted, or if you
have moved a unit from a different location, for example—you may want to
consider erasing the system database and starting from scratch. You must have
super user privileges in order to erase the system database.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
To erase the system database, follow these steps:
CAUTION: Before you erase the system database, make a record of all
configuration settings; these settings will be lost when you erase the database.
Also keep in mind that erasing the database is an action that cannot be undone.
Perform the following procedure only if you are sure that erasing the database is
your best course of action.
System Database to open the Erase System Database menu. This menu displays
the following warning and prompt:
This action will cause a SOFT RESET of the system.
Do you want to erase the system database (Y/N) [N]?
2 Enter yto erase the system database.
Configuring In-band
Management
In addition to managing the PathBuilder S330/S310 out-of-band, you can also
manage the unit in-band via the 10Base-T port on the near-end MCPU card (up to
ten VCs maximum).
For detailed instructions on configuring PVCs, see “Configuring Virtual Circuits” in
To configure in-band management via the 10Base-T port on the near-end MCPU
card, follow these steps:
If you use this method, you must use a new subnet with each PathBuilder
S330/S310 and a new static route for each new subnet on the management
station or router. You are also limited to managing ten remote units from the
central management unit,
1 Open the Add Virtual Circuit menu and set preliminary circuit configuration
parameters.
a From the Main Menu select [2] Configuration Management to open up the
Configuration Management Menu.
b Select [2] Manage Circuit. This opens the Virtual Circuit Menu.
c Select [2] Add Virtual Circuit.
d Enter the desired description for the circuit, and press [Enter].
e Enter 1to set the VC Class as PVC.
f Enter 1to set the VC Type as VCC.
2 Build a PVC on the near-end PathBuilder S330/S310, using the MCPU as side A of
the virtual circuit. To do this, you need to set the following side A parameters on
the Add Virtual Circuit screen, as shown in Figure 45.
n
Shaper Number—Choose the number corresponding to the desired shaper
value. You assign the shaper number from the MCPU Shapers screen. See
n
n
IP Address—This address must be different than the local host IP address.
Subnet Mask—Specify any acceptable address (for example, 255.255.255.0)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring In-band Management
73
Figure 45 Add Virtual Circuit Menu
3 Build a PVC on the far-end PathBuilder S330/S310, using the MCPU as side A of
the circuit. Set the following parameters on the Add Virtual Circuit screen:
n
Shaper Number—Choose the number corresponding to the desired shaper
value. You assign the shaper number from the MCPU Shapers screen. See
n
IP Address—You must use a different subnet than the one you used for the
near-end PathBuilder S330/S310.
n
n
Subnet Mask—Specify any acceptable address (for example, 255.255.255.0)
VPI/VCI—You must use the same values as you did for the near-end
PathBuilder S330/S310.
4 On the Manage IP Network Configuration menu, select [3] Default Gateway
Configuration and set the following:
a Set the default gateway on the far-end PathBuilder S330/S310 to the PVC IP
address you set for the near-end PathBuilder S330/S310 in step 1.
b Set the default gateway on the management station to the local host IP
address of the near-end PathBuilder S330/S310.
5 Apply your IP configuration changes.
a From the main menu, select [1] System Administration.
b From the System Administration menu, select [3] Manage IP Network
Configuration.
c From the Manage IP Network Configuration menu, select [1] Local Host IP
Configuration.
d From the Local Host IP Configuration menu, select [2] Apply IP Configuration
Changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER
S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND
APPLICATIONS
4
This chapter tells you how to configure the SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S330 and
SuperStack® II PathBuilder® S310 WAN access switches’ (PathBuilder S330/S310)
CPU, modules, ports, and related applications so that the devices can pass traffic.
It contains the following sections:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Viewing and
Configuring System
Information
The System Administration menu, shown in Figure 46, includes options that allow
you to view and configure system information. In addition to using this menu for
initial configuration, as described in Chapter 3, you can:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Specify general system information.
View system parameters for the RS-232 port.
View the current firmware version.
Download new firmware.
Update the flash file system.
Reset the interface card.
View an equipment list.
The following subsections describe these System Administration menu options.
See Chapter 3 for information about the options related to initial configuration:
configuring the system clock, setting communication parameters, setting the time
and date, and changing the default password.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 46 System Administration Menu
Specifying General General system information includes the following:
System Information
n
n
n
n
n
n
Shelf name
Customer name
Phone number
Maintenance contact
Location
Auto logout time
To specify or change general system information, follow these steps:
1 From the System Administration menu, select [1] General System Information to
display the General System Information menu shown in Figure 47. This menu
displays the current system information and provides options that allow you to
change the current settings.
2 Select the option corresponding to the setting you want to change. A prompt
appears at the bottom of the screen.
3 Enter the new setting.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any other settings you want to change.
5 Select [8] Previous Menu to return to the System Administration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing and Configuring System Information
77
Figure 47 Specifying General System Information
Viewing RS-232 Port You enter initial configuration information using the VT100 terminal connected to
Information details. To view the terminal configuration:
From the System Administration menu, select [5] RS-232 Port Configuration.
Viewing the Firmware To view the version number for the firmware that is currently running on the CPU:
Version
From the System Administration menu, select [6] Report Firmware Version to open
the Report Firmware Version screen, shown in Figure 48.
Figure 48 Report Firmware Version Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
The Report Firmware Version screen displays the following information about the
management processor active firmware (the upgradeable firmware currently being
used by the MCPU):
Version—The released firmware version number. This is the version number that
is displayed on the login screen.
Origins—The original engineering build number for the release.
If the Version and Origins release numbers are the same, then the release is not an
official release but rather a Beta test version.
Who—The user login ID for this software build.
Date—The date and time that the build was made.
Company Name—3Com Corporation (or OEM partner if desired)
Product Name—The PathBuilder product for which this image was built:
PathBuilder S700, PathBuilder S600, PathBuilder S330, or PathBuilder S310.
In addition to the management processor firmware information listed above, the
Report Firmware Version screen also lists the Boot Firmware Release—the version
number of the boot firmware containing the bootstrap code used to bring up the
operation firmware.)
Downloading New The PathBuilder S330/S310 module retains the operation firmware in a flash
Management Processor memory bank located in the motherboard. On power-up or reset, the code image
Firmware is copied from the flash memory to the main memory.
The flash memory retains a copy of the operation firmware and can be upgraded
using TFTP or the Xmodem protocol. TFTP is used if you are attached over the
Ethernet interface through a Telnet session. Xmodem is used if you are attached to
serial port 1 on a VT100 terminal.
We recommend that you avoid using the serial interfaces unless the Ethernet
interface is unavailable, as a download could take 30 minutes at 9600 baud using
the serial interfaces.
When downloading, the flash memory is overwritten with the new code. Once the
firmware is successfully downloaded, a system reset brings up the new code.
The following instructions pertain to UNIX environments. You can also download
firmware from a PC: from a TFTP application, configure for binary mode, specify
the location of the image files, and use the PUT command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing and Configuring System Information
79
Downloading via the Ethernet Port
To download new firmware using TFTP, via the Ethernet port, follow these steps:
Be sure to log in via Telnet. If you log in at a serial port, the download sequence
will attempt an Xmodem rather than a TFTP download.
1 Obtain the correct image file location and name from 3Com Customer Service.
2 Telnet into the PathBuilder S330/S310 unit.
3 From the System Administration menu, select [7] Download Firmware. The
following prompt appears:
This action will erase the flash memory
Do you want to download firmware (Y/N) [N]?
4 Enter yand wait for the Ready to download...message.
5 From a workstation or PC (typically the same one doing the Telnet), invoke TFTP
using the PathBuilder S330/S310 IP address. From TFTP do:
binary
put image.abs
where image.absis the filename of the image file to download)
The download will complete in about two minutes (over lightly loaded Ethernet).
The TFTP should indicate that the file is transferred, and the Telnet screen should
display “download complete.”
Downloading via the Serial Port
To download new firmware using the Xmodem protocol, via the serial port, follow
these steps:
You must use a terminal emulation program that supports Xmodem protocol.
1 Obtain the correct image file location and name from 3Com Customer Service.
2 Log into the PathBuilder S330/S310 unit through a serial port.
3 From the System Administration menu, select [7] Download Firmware. The
following prompt appears:
This action will erase the flash memory
Do you want to download firmware (Y/N) [N]?
4 Enter y. The PathBuilder S330/S310 unit assumes that an Xmodem download is to
be done and looks for that protocol over the serial port. Once the unit has erased
the flash memory, a message on the screen indicates that the unit is ready to
accept an Xmodem download.
5 On the terminal emulation prompt, select Xmodem protocol and input the file
name of the binary file to be downloaded.
The typical download time at 9600 baud is greater than 30 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Updating the Flash File The flash file system contains system configuration information which is
System automatically saved in flash memory at a predetermined interval. To update the
flash file system immediately, rather than at the next scheduled interval, follow
these steps:
1 From the System Administration menu, select [8] Update Flash File System. The
following prompt appears:
Do you want to update the flash file system (Y/N) [N]?
2 Enter yto update the flash file system.
CAUTION: The user configuration data is automatically saved into flash memory
every minute. If there is a system failure (for example. a power failure), any
changes that you make during the auto-saving interval will be lost. Thus, we
recommend that you use the [8] Update Flash File System option, as described
above, immediately after you make major configuration changes.
Resetting the Interface The PathBuilder S330/S310 software allows you to reset only the MCPU interface
Card card and the Voice Compression module (VCM) card. Resetting the MCPU reboots
the system. To reset the MCPU interface card or the VCM card, follow these steps:
If you reset the MCPU interface card, you will terminate your Telnet session.
1 From the System Administration menu, select [9] Reset Interface Card. You are
prompted to select the card you want to reset.
2 Enter the option corresponding to the card you want to reset (MCPU or VCM). The
following prompt appears:
Are you sure you want to reset this card (Y/N) [N]?
3 Enter yto reset the selected card.
Viewing an Equipment To view information about the modules currently installed on your PathBuilder
List S330/S310:
shows a representative Equipment List.
Figure 49 Equipment List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Configuration Management Menu
81
The Equipment List displays the following information for each installed module:
Slot—Slot number. This is a reference number for the ports on the motherboard.
This number corresponds to the number on the List Card menu. (See Figure 51,
later in this chapter.)
Card type—The card type: Shelf, MCPU, CTX, T1/E1 UNI (4), OC3/STM-1 UNI,
SIM, Ethernet, or CBR T-1DSX, or CBR E1.
PART#-idprom—The part number as programmed at the factory.
PART#-oem—The part number for OEM customers.
Serial #—The serial number for the card. This is the same for all ports on the
motherboard. The optional CBR module has a separate serial number.
Rev #—The revision number for the card. This is the same for all ports on the
motherboard, as they come already installed in the unit. The optional CBR module
has a separate revision number.
Using the
Configuration
Management Menu
Select [2] Configuration Management from the Main menu to display the
Configuration Management menu, shown in Figure 50. Use this menu to access
submenus and screens that allow you to:
n
Manage cards—View shelf configuration information and configure the
PathBuilder S330/S310 CPU, CTX, ports, CBR module, and Voice Compression
module.
n
n
n
Manage circuits—List, add, modify, and delete virtual circuits.
Manage the bridge—Set the bridge aging timer and configure the bridge.
Manage the video dial feature—View the call routing table, manually start
and end video dial-up sessions.
Figure 50 Configuration Management Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Using the List Card
Menu
The List Card menu, shown in Figure 51, lists the shelf and all installed interfaces.
To display the List Card menu follow these steps:
1 From the Main menu select [2] Configuration Management.
2 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
Select [0] Shelf from the List Card menu to view configuration information for the
shelf. The Shelf Configuration screen is a read-only screen that displays the
Hardware Revision and Serial Number.
The remaining options (1 and above) on the List Card menu display menus that
allow you to configure specific modules and ports. The following sections tell you
how to perform the specific configurations available from the List Card menu.
Figure 51 List Card Menu
Configuring the
Management CPU
MCPU configuration involves viewing configuration information and managing
shapers. To display the MCPU Menu, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu.
From the MCPU Card menu, you access the submenus and screens from which
you view configuration information and configure shapers, as described in the
following subsections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Management CPU
83
Figure 52 MCPU Configuration Menu
Viewing MCPU To view configuration information for the management CPU:
Configuration
Information
From the MCPU Configuration menu, select [1] Card Configuration to open the
Management Processor Configuration screen. This screen displays the following
CPU configuration information:
n
n
n
Hardware revision
Serial number
Status (In Service or Out of Service)
Configuring MCPU The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports three MCPU shapers parameters:
Shapers
n
Peak Cell Rate (PCR)—The maximum rate that can be passed.
n
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR)—The maximum average rate that a bursty, on-off
traffic source can send; used in conjunction with maximum burst size.
n
Maximum Burst Size (MBS)—The maximum number of cells that can be sent
at the peak rate; used in conjunction with sustained cell rate.
to 15 shapers. The values that you set for the shapers on this screen are the values
that are then available for the Shaper Number parameter that you set when you
configure certain types of virtual circuits. See “Common VIrtual Circuit
How you configure the MCPU shapers depends on the type of service you have.
n
If you have a peak rate service:
n
Set the peak rate at the maximum allowable value.
n
Set the sustained cell rate at the same rate as the peak rate.
n
If you have a sustained rate service:
n
Set the peak rate at the line rate (for example 45Mbps for a DS3 line).
n
Set the sustained cell rate and maximum burst rate at the values given to
you by your service provider.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
CAUTION: When assigning shapers for VCM circuits, be sure that the shapers are
wider than the bandwidth used for the voice traffic.
To configure the MCPU shapers, follow these steps:
to display the MCPU Shaper screen, shown in Figure 53.
The MCPU Shaper screen consists of a table listing the current shaper values in
bits/second (bits for the maximum burst size shaper) and cells/second (cells for the
maximum burst size shaper). Initially, the shapers are set to default values.
Figure 53 MCPU Shaper Screen
2 To enter a new shaper value, use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move to the
cell in the shaper table that you want to change.
n
To set a new Sustainable Cell Rate or Peak Cell Rate shaper, enter the new
value in the bits/second (bps) column. The system automatically calculates the
cells/second (cps) based on the value you enter.
n
To set a new Maximum Burst Size shaper, enter the new value in the cells
column. The system automatically calculates the bits based on the value you
enter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CTX
85
Configuring the CTX
CTX configuration involves managing buffers and managing shapers. To display
the CTX Menu, follow these steps:
to display the List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
Figure 54 CTX Menu
From the CTX menu, you access the submenus and screens from which you
perform buffer and shaper configuration, as described in the following
subsections.
Configuring CTX The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports ten peak rate shapers. The shapers are
Shapers separated into ten virtual queue-trunks:
n
4 for the group 1 IMA WAN interface:
n
n
n
n
Trunk bulk
medium
low1
low2
n
2 for the AAL5 SAR (Ethernet and V.35/RS-449 packet)
n
SAR output
SAR input
n
CAUTION: The default configuration is optimized for performance.
4 for the OC3/STM-1 interface:
n
n
n
n
n
n
OC3/STM-1 bulk (MMF or SMF)
OC3/STM-1 queue 1
OC3/STM-1 queue 2
OC3/STM-1 queue 3
OC3/STM-1 queue 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
You can assign shapers for these queue-trunks based on peak rate (or bulk
shaping) towards the WAN. To do this, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu.
3 From the CTX menu, select [1] Manage Shapers. The CTX Shapers menu appears,
Figure 55 CTX Shapers Menu
4 Select the number corresponding to the shaper you want to configure. A prompt
appears similar to the following:
Enter cells/sec, (150..195 312K)
5 Enter the desired shaper value.
Configuring CTX Buffers The CTX is an output-buffered switch, with a 64K cell buffer capacity. The
software sets up a default configuration, but you can change it if you want. For
example, you should make the queue (buffer) used for your router traffic as large
as possible. To do this, you must first deallocate memory from another
queue—OC3/STM-1 queue 3, for example—and reallocate the memory to the
queue that will carry your router traffic. See “CTX Output Queues and Memory
Partition” in Appendix B, for reference information pertaining to configuring the
output buffers.
To change the default output buffer configuration, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu.
3 From the CTX menu, select [2] Manage Buffers. The CTX Buffers menu, shown in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CTX
87
Figure 56 CTX Buffers Menu
4 Select the number corresponding to the queue for which you want to change the
buffer size. The CTX Queue Buffer Configuration menu, shown in Figure 57,
appears. This menu lists the current buffer configuration for the selected queue
and provides options that allow you to change the buffer size and set congestion
thresholds.
Figure 57 Configuring CTX Buffers and Congestion Thresholds
5 Select [1] Set Buffer Size. The following prompt appears:
Enter Buffer Size (768..62580 cells):
6 Enter the desired buffer size, in cells (256 cells = 1 block).
7 Use the [2] Set Congestion On and/or [3] Set Congestion Off options to change
the default congestion thresholds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
When you select one of these options, a prompt appears at the bottom of the
screen, allowing you to enter a new threshold in the range 0% to 100%. When
the buffer reaches the Congestion On threshold, the congestion filter is on. When
the buffer falls below the Congestion Off threshold, the congestion filter is off.
For example, if you set Congestion On to 75% and Congestion Off to 50%, the
congestion filter is on when the buffer is 75% full and is off when the buffer drops
below 50% full.
thresholds.
CAUTION: You should enable early packet discard for AAL5 traffic only.
8 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the CTX Buffers menu.
9 Press [Esc] to return to the CTX menu.
10 Select [3] Apply CTX Buffer Changes to apply your settings.
CAUTION: This operation will affect traffic.
Setting Congestion Thresholds
For every connection where early packet discard is enabled, a status is kept when
there is a partial packet for that connection in the queue. Once the queue cell level
exceeds the Congestion On thresholds, only connections with partial packets
already existing in the queue are allowed in. Cells from other connections are
dropped. Once the congestion has subsided to the Congestion Off level, then all
remaining connections are allowed.
Set the Congestion On threshold based on the maximum packet size expected and
the number of active connections sending packets at a particular instant based on
a probability model.
Set the Congestion On level to allow some hysteresis in the operation.
Configuring Ports
The PathBuilder S330/S310 ports each have an administrative and an operational
status. To set up a virtual circuit, you must first set the administrative status of the
port which will carry the circuit online to In Service. You can also configure other
parameters, depending on the type of port.
When you set the administrative status to Out of Service, the operational status is
set to Out of Service whether or not the port is actually operational or not. Once
you set the administrative status to In Service (online), the operational status will
indicate the true port status (Out of Service if there is a port failure, or In Service if
not).
The following sections tell you how to configure specific ports on the PathBuilder
S330/S310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface
89
Configuring the T1/E1
Interface
Configuring the T1/E1 interface involves the following tasks:
n
n
n
n
Configuring the four individual T1/E1 ports
Setting up and configuring UNI and/or IMA groups (if desired)
Viewing IMA link and group status
Configuring the T1/E1 card
The PathBuilder S310 has only one T1/E1 port and does not support IMA groups.
Configuring the T1/E1 To configure the individual T1/E1 ports, follow these steps:
Ports
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 54.
2 From the List Card menu, select [3] DS1 UNI to open the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI
Configuration menu. Figure 58 shows the T1 (DS1) UNI Configuration menu. The
E1 UNI Configuration menu is the same.
Figure 58 T1 (DS1) UNI Configuration Menu
3 Select [1] Port Configuration to open the T1 (DS1)/E1 UNI Port Configuration
UNI Port Configuration menu is the same.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 59 T1 (DS1) UNI Port Selection Menu
4 Select the number corresponding to the T1/E1port you want to configure to open
menu. The E1 UNI Port Configuration menu is similar.
Figure 60 Configuring a T1/E1 Port
The Port Configuration menu lists the current parameters for the selected T1/E1
port and provides options for changing the settings.
5 Change any of the following information (by selecting the appropriate options
and responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen) to
configure the selected T1/E1 port:
Application—The application:
CSU—straight T1, long haul (up to 2,000 feet)
DSX—short haul T1 (up to 655 feet)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface
91
LBO (T1 only)—Line Build Out. The setting for the transmit signal level: 0, 7.5, 15,
or 22 db. The LBO compensates for the distance between the card and the
CSU/repeater. It is a setting for the transmit signal level.
Framing—The type of frame organization configured for the T1/E1 port interface:
D4 or ESF for T1. For E1 Framing is a read-only parameters and is always set to
multi-frame. Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection
framing.
CAUTION: A framing mismatch can cause LOF, OOF alarm conditions and result in
traffic loss.
Timing (T1 only)—The type of input clock service configured for the T1 module.
Set the timing source to system if you are using the T1 module as a trunk module.
System—Configures the T1 module to use the internal clock as the timing
source.
Loop—Configures the T1 module to use the input port Rx clock as the timing
source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select Loop if the T1 UNI
module is used for the network/carrier service termination, in which case the
carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing source.
Gain Limit (T1 only)—The setting for the receive signal level: 26 or 36 dB.
AFA—Enables (yes) or disables (no) Automatic Frequency Adjustment. AFA
monitors the error rate detected by the CRC (cyclic redundancy check)
error-checking scheme of each of the T1/E1 links (ports). It automatically disables
and re-enables a port when the error rate on that port is at a set level for a set
time.
Activation Rate—The CRC (cyclic redundancy check) BER (bit error rate) at which
AFA takes a link out of service based on the Activation Min.: 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7.
Error Rates” below. This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled.
Activation Min.—The period during which AFA monitors the link condition prior
to taking it out of service, in minutes: 1 to 15. This parameter appears only when
AFA is enabled.
Deactivation Rate—The CRC (cyclic redundancy check) BER (bit error rate) at
which AFA puts a link in service based on the Deactivation Min.: 10-4, 10-5, 10-6,
Bit Error Rates” below. This parameter appears only when AFA is enabled.
Deactivation Min.—The period during which AFA monitors the link condition
prior to putting it in service, in minutes: 1 to 15. This parameter appears only
when AFA is enabled.
Admin Status—Administrative status: Out of Service or In Service.
Inband Lpbk (T1 only)—Enables or disables inband loopback detection.
Activation/Deactivation Bit Error Rates
periods. Use this table as a reference when you are selecting activation and
deactivation bit error rates for the AFA feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Table 22 Bit Error Rates Translated into Total Number of Errors
Bit
Error
Rate
Total Errors in Total Errors in Total Errors in Total Errors in Total Errors in
(BER)
1 second
1 Minute
2 Minutes
5 Minutes
15 Minutes
13500
1350
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
15
900
90
9
1800
180
18
4500
450
45
1.5
0.15
135
0.015
1
2
5
13
The T1 (DS1)/E1 UNI Configuration menu lists the following additional read-only
parameters:
Group—The number of the group to which the ports belong.
Tx LID—Transmit link identification. This should match the Rx LID of the remote
end IMA device. Tx LID is displayed only if the port is part of an IMA group.
Rx LID—Receive link identification. This should match the Tx LID of the remote
end IMA device. Rx LID is displayed only if the port is part of an IMA group.
Operation Link Delay—Operation link delay synchronized, in msec. This is the
actual link delay used to synchronize the IMA links. Operations LDS is displayed
only if the port is part of an IMA group.
6 Select [9] Previous Menu to return to the T1/E1 UNI Configuration menu.
7 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other T1/E1 ports that you want to configure.
Configuring UNI and You can map two to four T1/E1 ports into an IMA group, thereby creating a
IMA Groups logical, inverse-multiplexed, high-speed link. The PathBuilder S330 also supports
UNI groups.
The PathBuilder S310 features a single T1/E1 port and does not support IMA or
UNI groups.
The DS3/E3 UNI shares the same queue (Queue 1) as the Group 1 IMA UNI;
therefore, if a DS3/E3 expansion card is installed in slot 9, the system deletes
Group 1 and all corresponding VCs on startup and generates an information only
alarm. Furthermore, you cannot add Group 1 if a DS3/E3 expansion card is
installed—either in the chassis or in the database. If you change the card type for
slot 9 to DS3/E3 via the List Card menu, Group 1 and the corresponding VCs are
not deleted until the system is restarted.
Adding UNI Groups
To set up a UNI group, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
2 From the List Card menu, select [3] DS1 UNI to open the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI
Configuration menu, shown earlier in Figure 58.
3 From the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu, select [3] Group
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 63 Add Group Menu (Adding UNI Group)
6 Select [1] Set Admin. Port(s). The following prompt appears at the bottom of the
screen:
Enter Admin Port(s):
7 Enter the port numbers for the T1/E1 port you want to include in the UNI group.
8 Select [2] Set Admin. Status and enter 2to put the group in service.
9 Select [3] Previous Menu.
10 If desired, repeat steps 5-8 to set up a second UNI group and put it into service.
Adding IMA Groups
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
2 From the List Card menu, select [3] DS1 UNI to open the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI
Configuration menu, shown earlier in Figure 58.
3 From the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu, select [3] Group
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 66 Add Group Menu (Adding IMA Group)
6 Select [1] Set Admin. Port(s). The following prompt appears at the bottom of the
screen:
Enter Admin Port(s) (1..4):
7 Enter the port numbers for the T1/E1 ports you want to include in the group. You
can use a hyphen to indicate a range of ports. For example, to include ports 1-3 in
a group you could enter 1-3.
8 Specify any of the following information (by selecting the appropriate options and
responding to the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen) to configure
the IMA group.
Frame Length—The frame length: 32, 64, 128, 256.
Max. Link Delay—The maximum link differential delay allowed in the group: 0 to
70 msec.
Min Tx/Rx Startup Ports—The minimum number of ports in the group that must
be operational in order for the group to come up: 1 to n, where n is the number of
ports in the group.
Min Tx/Rx Oper. Ports—The minimum number of ports in the group that must
be operational in order for the group to come up and be operational: 1 to n,
where n is the number of ports in the group.
IMA ID—A user-selected number to identify the IMA group.
Test Link—The port number of the link that is to perform the test procedure.
Test Pattern—The pattern to be looped back in the test procedure: 0-254.
Test Procedure—Enables or disables the test procedure. When the test procedure
is enabled, the test pattern is sent out on the designated test link and then looped
back on the other links in the group.
Admin Status—The administrative status of the group: In Service or Out of
Service.
9 Select [11] Previous Menu.
10 If desired, repeat steps 5-8 to set up another IMA group.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface
97
Viewing and Modifying IMA and UNI Groups
Once you have added a group, you use the List/Modify Group menu to view and
modify group configuration parameters.
To view and/or modify an existing group, follow these steps:
the List/Modify Group Selection menu.
2 Enter the number corresponding to the group you want to view or modify to
display the List/Modify Group menu for that group. Figure 67 shows the
List/Modify Group menu for an IMA group. The List/Modify Group menu for a UNI
group is similar, but it lists only the parameters you can set for UNI groups: Admin
Ports and Admin Status.
Figure 67 Modifying an Existing IMA Group
3 If the Admin. Status of the group is In Service, select [10] Set Admin. Status and
enter 1to take the group out of service.
You must take the group out of service before you can modify it.
4 Change any of the group parameters as desired.
Deleting IMA and UNI Groups
To delete an existing IMA or UNI group, follow these steps:
Delete Group Selection menu.
2 Enter the number corresponding to the group you want to delete to open the
Delete Group menu, shown in Figure 68. This menu lists the parameters for the
selected group and warns you that deleting the group will delete any virtual
circuits using that group.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 68 Delete Group Menu
3 Enter yin response to the confirmation prompt to delete the group.
When you delete an IMA group, all the VCs using that group are also deleted.
Viewing IMA Link Status To view IMA Link Status for a selected T1/E1 port, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
2 From the List Card menu, select [3] DS1 UNI to open the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI
Configuration menu, shown earlier in Figure 58.
The IMA Status menu lists only the ports that are members of an IMA group.
Figure 69 IMA Link Status Menu
4 Enter the number corresponding to the port for which you want to view IMA link
status. The IMA Link Status screen for that port appears, as shown in Figure 70.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface
99
Figure 70 IMA Link Status Screen
The IMA Link Status screen lists the following information pertaining to the IMA
status of an individual link in an IMA group.
NE Tx State—The near-end transmit state in the interworking link state machine.
NE Rx State—The near-end transmit state in the interworking link state machine.
FE Tx State—The far-end transmit state in the interworking link state machine.
FE Rx State—The far-end transmit state in the interworking link state machine.
Table 23 Possible IMA Link States
State
Tx Condition
Rx Condition
not in group
This link is not part of the IMA
group.
This link is not part of the IMA
group.
unusable blocked
This is caused by LOS, which
would result in back clock from delay, or mismatched protocol.
the framer if the port is in
This is caused by AFA, excessive
looped timing.
usable
active
This link is ready to pass data.
This link is passing data.
This link is ready to pass data.
This link is passing data.
NE Rx Failure—Near-end Rx failure status in the interworking link state machine.
link failure status conditions.
FE Rx Failure—Far-end Rx failure status in the interworking link state machine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Table 24 Possible IMA LInk Failure Status Conditions
Failure
Description
link failure
LIF failure
LODS failure
Misconnected
blocked
This is caused by LOS, AIS, OOF, or LCD.
This is caused by LIF.
This is caused by LODS.
This is caused by bad IMA ID, bad link ID, or bad SCCI.
This is caused by AFA, excessive delay, or mismatched protocol.
fault
This is caused by bad M value, bad symmetry, bad offset, or
duplicate link ID.
far end Tx link unusable
far end Rx link unusable
no failure
This is caused by the far end reporting Tx unusable in the ICP
cells.
This is caused by the far end reporting Rx unusable in the ICP
cells.
The link has no failure.
Tx LID—Transmit logical link ID: 0-31. This number reflects the local IMA ID.
Rx LID—Receive logical link ID: 0-31. This number reflects the remote IMA ID.
Operation Link Delay—The differential link delay referenced to the fastest link in
the same group.
Rx Test Pattern—The received test pattern received: 0-254; 255 indicates that no
pattern has been received.
Test Procedure—The status of the test procedure: disabled, operating, or link
failed.
Viewing IMA Group To view IMA status for a selected group, follow these steps:
Status
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
2 From the List Card menu, select the number corresponding to the slot in which the
T1 UNI or E1 UNI card is installed to open the Group Menu.
3 Select [4] IMA Group Status to open the Group Status Selection menu, shown in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface 101
Figure 71 Group Status Selection Menu
4 Enter the number corresponding to the group for which you want to view IMA
status. The IMA Group Status screen for that group appears, as shown in
Figure 72 IMA Group Status Screen
The IMA Group Status screen lists the following information pertaining to the IMA
status of the group as a whole.
Operation Port(s)—The port numbers of the active links in the group.
NE State—The near-end state.
FE State—The far-end state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Failure—Failure status:
Near End Asymmetric—Near end rejected asymmetrical configuration or
operation chosen by the far end.
Far End Invalid M—Far end rejected the M value chosen by the user on the
near end.
Other Failures—The near end group detected multiple IMA ID, multiple M, or
multiple symmetry, or the group has duplicated IMA ID, or the far end reported
configuration abort without any reason.
Near End Insufficient Links—This is a normal transitional state when the
near end group is coming up. If it persists, it indicates that the group indeed
does not have enough links to come up and pass data.
Far End Insufficient Links—This is a normal transitional state when the far
end group is coming up. If it persists, it indicates that the group indeed does
not have enough links to come up and pass data.
Near End Blocked—The near end group cannot pass data due to LODS.
Far End Blocked—The far end group has enough links, but cannot pass data
for some other reason.
Near End Startup—This is a normal transitional state when the near end
group is coming up.
Far End Startup—This is a normal transitional state when the far end group is
coming up.
No Failure—The group has no failure.
FE Tx Clocking—Far-end transmit clocking mode: common or independent.
Tx Timing Ref. Link—The near end transmitting timing reference port for cell
clock recovery.
Rx Timing Ref. Link—The near end received timing reference port for cell clock
recovery.
Rx IMA ID—The IMA receive group ID. This number reflects the remote IMA ID.
NE State Last Changed—The date and time at which the near-end state last
changed.
Rx Framer Length—Receive M value. The frame length of the first link that can
communicate with the far end is chosen as the frame length of the far end group.
Least Delay Link—The port number of the fasted link in the group.
Oper. LInk Delay—Operational link delay; the actual value of the link differential
delay.
Tx Avable. Cell Rate (cps)—The available cell rate for active Tx links in this
group: 0-28,728 cps for T1, M=128; 0-35,920 cps for E1, M=128. The available
cell rate indicates how much bandwidth can be carried across the group. It varies,
depending on how many links in the group are actually working.
Rx Avable Cell Rate (cps)—The available cell rate for active Rx links in this group:
0-28,728 cps for T1, M=128; 0-35,920 cps for E1, M=128. The available cell rate
indicates how much bandwidth can be carried across the group. It varies,
depending on how many links in the group are actually working.
# Tx Configured Links—The number of configured transmit links.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the T1/E1 Interface 103
# Rx Configured Links—The number of configured receive links.
#Tx Active links—The number of active transmit links.
#Rx Active links—The number of active receive links.
Configuring the T1/ E1 The only type of configuration you can perform on the T1/E1 UNI card is to put it
Card in service or out of service.
To put the T1/E1 UNI card in service or out of service, follow these steps:
2 From the List Card menu, select the number corresponding to the slot in which the
T1 UNI or E1 UNI card is installed to display the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI
Configuration menu, shown earlier in Figure 58.
3 From the T1 (DS1) UNI or E1 UNI Configuration menu, select [5] Card Information
Configuration menu. The E1 UNI Card Configuration menu is the same.
Figure 73 Configuring the T1/E1 Card
4 Select [1] Set Admin Service and enter 2to put the card in service or 1to take it
out of service.
In addition to the current T1/E1 card configuration, the T1/E1 UNI Card
Configuration menu lists the following group-related information:
Operation Group—The active IMA groups in the card.
Num. of IMA Group(s)—The number of IMA groups created (but not necessarily
active) on the card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Configuring the
OC3/STM-1 Port
To configure the OC3/STM-1 port, follow these steps:
The PathBuilder S310 does not support OC3/STM-1; the OC3/STM-1 port is
disabled on that device.
2 From the List Card menu, select [4] OC3 UNI to open the SONET UNI
configuration for the OC3/STM-1 port and provides options that allow you to
change certain settings.
Figure 74 Configuring the OC3/STM-1 Port
3 Set the following parameters as desired:
Admin. Status—Administrative status: Out of Service or In Service.
Sonet Interface Mode—The SONET interface supports two modes: OC3 and
STM-1. Choose the mode used at your location. OC3 is used most often in the
United States, while STM-1 is common in other countries.
ATM Payload Scramble—Enables (yes) or disables (no) payload scrambling for
the OC3/STM-1 port. The default is disabled (no). Payload scrambling is a
technique used to avoid certain transmission equipment behaviors (for example,
erroneous alarm conditions) that are caused by sensitivity to certain bit patterns in
the ATM payload. When you set payload scrambling to yes, the ATM Payload
Scramble scrambles the 48 byte payload in outgoing cells in a defined manner and
unscrambles the payload in incoming cells. The payload scramble settings must
match at the two ends of the OC3/SDH trunk.
Timing Source—The timing source for the OC3/STM-1 transmit clock.
Loop—Configures the OC3/STM-1 port interface to use the input port Rx clock
as the timing source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select Loop if
the OC3/STM-1 port is used for the network/carrier service termination, in
which case the carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing source.
System—Configures the OC3/STM-1 port interface to use the internal system
clock as the timing source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the DS3/E3 UNI Module 105
Configuring the
DS3/E3 UNI Module
To configure the DS3 UNI or E3 UNI module, follow these steps:
1 From the List Card menu, select [9] DS3 UNI to open the DS3 UNI Configuration
menu. Figure 75 shows the DS3 UNI Configuration menu. The E3 UNI
Configuration menu is similar.
Figure 75 DS3 UNI Configuration Menu
2 Set the following parameters as desired:
Admin Status—Administrative Status: In Service or Out of Service.
LBO Length (DS3 only)—Line Build Out length. The signal
generation/regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder S600 and the
next crossconnect or FOTs (Fiber Optic Terminal system), in feet: 0-225 or
225-450.
DS3 Framing Mode (DS3 only)—The type of frame organization configured
for the specified port interface: Cbit or M23. Set this parameter to match the
framing type offered by your service provider. Cbit is the most common setting,
as its use of overhead bits for administration and maintenance allows the
service provider more visibility in isolating any issues with the physical line
connections through the WAN. You must match this setting at the two ends of
the DS3 trunk.
ATM Cell Mapping—How the carrier will provision the DS3 UNI service from
the carrier ATM switch: Clear (HEC) or PLCP (Physical Layer Convergence
Protocol). Clear is the option preferred by both domestic and international
service providers and within private ATM networks, as it gives more payload
bandwidth than PLCP. You must match this setting at the two ends of the DS3
trunk.
ATM Payload Scramble—Enables (yes) or disables (No) payload scrambling
for the DS3 port. Payload scrambling scrambles the 48-byte payload in
outgoing cells in a defined manner and unscrambles the payload in incoming
cells. It is a technique used to avoid certain transmission equipment behaviors
(for example, erroneous alarm conditions) that are caused by sensitivity to
certain bit patterns in the ATM payload. You must match this setting at the
two ends of the DS3 trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
FEAC Loopback (DS3 only)—Enables or disables the system from responding
to FEAC (Far-End Alarm Condition) loopback commands (loopback activate and
deactivate FEAC codes) from the central office. FEAC is a DS3 overhead
function that the service provider may use for establishing loopback for
problem resolution of the network. The service provider uses FEAC codes to
obtain downstream or upstream conditions of a DS3 network. When the FEAC
Loopback option is enabled, the system responds to a loopback activate
command by enabling the DS3 line loopback. The system removes the
loopback automatically after 15 minutes or when it receives the deactivate
command.
DS3 Timing Source (DS3 only)—The timing source for the DS3 transmit clock:
system or loop. If you set the DS3 Timing Source to system at one end of the
DS3 trunk, you must set it to loop at the other end.
System—Configures the port interface to use the system reference clock
within the shelf as a reference for transmitting.
Loop—Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the
timing source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select this option
if the DS3 UNI module is used for the network/carrier service termination, in
which case the carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing
source.
E3 Timing Source (E3 only)—The timing source for the E3 transmit clock:
system or loop. If you set the E3 Timing Source to system at one end of the E3
trunk, you must set it to loop at the other end.
System—Configures the port interface to use the system reference clock
within the shelf as a reference for transmitting.
Loop—Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the
timing source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select this option
if the E3 UNI module is used for the network/carrier service termination, in
which case the carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing
source.
PLCP Timing Source (DS3 only)—The PLCP timing source for the DS3 port:
System Clock—PLCP is timed from the internal 8kHz backplane clock.
DS3 Timing—PLCP is timed from the 8kHz reference clock derived from
the received PLCP.
CTX Timing Source—The CTX timing source for the DS3/E3 port.
DS3/E3 Rx Clock—Selects the DS3 or E3 Rx clock as the CTX timing source.
Configuring the Serial
Interface
Configuring the serial interface involves the following tasks:
n
Configuring the serial port
Configuring the serial card
n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Serial Interface 107
Configuring the Serial To configure the serial port, follow these steps:
Port
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
2 From the List Card menu, select [5] SIM to display the SIM Configuration Port/Card
Selection menu, shown in Figure 76.
Figure 76 SIM Configuration Port/Card Selection Menu
3 Select [1] Port 1 to display the SIM Port Configuration Port/LMI selection menu,
Figure 77 SIM Port Configuration Port/LMI Selection Menu
4 Select [1] Port Configuration to display the SIM Port Configuration menu, shown
in Figure 78. This menu displays the current serial port configuration and provides
options that allow you to change certain parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 78 Configuring the Serial Port
5 Change the following parameters, as desired:
Link Type—The input/output protocol for encapsulation and SAR to AAL5
conversion.
DXI —ATM Forum Mode 1A
SDLC—ITU standard HDLC/SDLC frame
Frame Relay—Frame Relay Forum Specification 5 and 8; modes 1 and 2
Terminal Timing Source—This parameter applies only when the attached cable
is DCE type cable. The setting for the Terminal Timing depends on the nature and
speed of the device application, but the typical configuration is Internal—the
PathBuilder S330/S310 provides the clock for the device application. In any case,
the Terminal Timing Source setting for the PathBuilder S330/S310 serial port must
be the opposite of that for the device. For example, if the Terminal Timing Source
for the router is set to Internal, then you must set the Terminal Timing Source for
the serial port to External.
Internal—Configures the port to use the internal clock as the terminal timing
source. The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides the clock to clock in the data
traffic from a router or other data device.
External—Configures the port to use an external device as the terminal timing
source. The PathBuilder S330/S310 accepts the clock for data from the router
or other data device.
Receive Timing Phase—Receive timing phase control. This parameter applies
only when the attached cable is DCE type cable. Depending on the speed of the
device application and the clock phases, particularly those of the return clock, you
may have to set Receive Timing Phase to Inverted (invert the clock) to ensure
correct clock and data phase. This option is used most often to correct for cable
length delays when Terminal Timing is set to Internal.
Normal—The receive timing from the remote endpoint (node) is normal
clocking.
Inverted—The receive timing from the remote endpoint (node) is inverted
clocking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Serial Interface 109
Data Rate—The data rate supported by the port: 48K, 97K, 195K, 390K, 781K,
1.5M, 3.1M, or 6.2M. This parameter applies only when the attached cable is DCE
type cable. It is a very important parameter, as it allows you to direct the SIM to
shape particular data applications so as not to exceed the guaranteed bandwidth
established by your service provider in your service contract. The Data Rate setting
also allows you to optimize the entire WAN ATM application by traffic engineering
your ATM access applications so as to maintain traffic flow across the network.
Min. Flag Bytes—The minimum number of flag bytes required to distinguish a
frame: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 14.
FCS Size—The number of bytes to use for FCS (Frame Check Sequence)
calculation for each frame. FCS is the CRC remainder sent at the end of a frame.
This parameter is valid only for HDLC/SDLC data.
Admin. Status—Administrative status: Out of Service or In Service.
6 Select [8] Previous Menu to return to the SIM Port Configuration Port/LMI
Selection menu, shown earlier in Figure 77.
7 If desired, selected [2] LMI Configuration to display the SIM LMI Configuration
menu, shown in Figure 79. This menu allows you to set the protocol for the local
management interface.
You can set the LMI protocol only if the Link Type is set to Frame Relay on the SIM
Port Configuration menu. If the Link Type is set to DXI or SDLC, the LMI
Configuration option does not appear on the SIM Port Configuration Port/LMI
Figure 79 SIM LMI Configuration Menu
8 Select [1] Set Protocol. The following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
(1 = none, 2 = q.933a, 3 = t1.617d)
9 Enter the number corresponding to the desired protocol or 1for no LMI.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Configuring the Serial The only type of configuration you can perform on the serial card is to put it in
Card service or out of service. To set the administrative status of the serial card, follow
these steps:
2 From the List Card menu, select [5] SIM to display the SIM Configuration Port/Card
Selection menu, shown in Figure 76.
3 Select [2] Card Configuration to display the SIM Card Configuration menu, shown
Figure 80 Configuring the Serial Card
4 Select [1] Set Admin. Status to put the Ethernet card in service or out of service.
The maximum frame size is fixed at 8KB.
Configuring the
Ethernet Interface
Configuring the Ethernet interface involves the following tasks:
n
n
n
Configuring the Ethernet port
Configuring the Ethernet card
Configuring the bridge
Configuring the The only type of configuration you can perform on the Ethernet port is to put it in
Ethernet Port service or out of service. To set the administrative status of the Ethernet port,
follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
2 From the List Card menu, select [6] ETHERNET to display the Ethernet
Configuration Port/Card Selection menu, shown in Figure 81.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 111
Figure 81 Ethernet Configuration Port/Card Selection Menu
3 Select [1] Port 1 to display the Ethernet Port Configuration menu, shown in
Figure 82. This menu displays the current Ethernet port configuration and provides
an option that allows you to set the administrative status for the Ethernet port.
Figure 82 Configuring the Ethernet Port
4 Select [1] Set Admin. Status to put the Ethernet port in service or out of service.
Configuring the The only type of configuration you can perform on the Ethernet card is to put it in
Ethernet Card service or out of service. To set the administrative status of the Ethernet card,
follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
2 From the List Card menu, select [6] ETHERNET to display the Ethernet
Configuration Port/Card Selection menu, shown earlier in Figure 81.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
3 Select [2] Card Information to display the Ethernet Card Configuration menu,
shown in Figure 83. This menu displays the current Ethernet card configuration
and provides an option that allows you to set the administrative status for the
Ethernet card.
Figure 83 Configuring the Ethernet Card
4 Select [1] Set Admin. Status to put the Ethernet card in service or out of service.
Configuring the Bridge All of the virtual channels assigned to a particular slot and port form a network
bridge. In order to enable the Ethernet port to operate, you must configure the
bridge with the required user-filtering options and an aging timer value.
The aging timer value you specify will be listed in the Age column on the List
Forwarding Table. The system deletes station address entries when they have had
no traffic for the specified period of time. To keep addresses in the List Forwarding
table permanently, set the Aging Timer to Permanent. For further details about the
To configure the bridge, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [3] Manage Bridge to display
the Manage Bridge menu, shown in Figure 84.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 113
Figure 84 Manage Bridge Menu
2 From the Manage Bridge menu, select [1] Bridge Configuration to display the
Bridge Configuration menu, shown in Figure 85. The current aging timer setting is
displayed below the menu title (3 minutes in the sample menu shown in the
figure).
Figure 85 Bridge Configuration Menu
3 Select [1] Set Aging Timer. The following prompt appears at the bottom of the
screen:
Enter Aging Timer (minute):
4 Enter the desired timer interval, in minutes.
5 Select [2] Previous Menu to return to the Manage Bridge menu.
6 From the Manage Bridge menu, select [2] Ethernet Slot #6 Port 1 to display the
Bridge Menu for the Ethernet port, as shown in Figure 86.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 86 Bridge Menu
From the Bridge menu, you can:
n
Configure source protocol filtering, source address filtering, and destination
address filtering.
n
n
Display the forwarding table for the bridge.
Construct a static table (a table of source/destination pairs which you do not
want to be aged out of the forwarding table) for the bridge.
The following subsections tell you how to perform these operations.
Configuring Source Protocol Filtering
Source protocol filtering allows the bridge to filter out packets with certain
protocols. You can use this type of filtering to prevent certain type of protocol
traffic from being bridged across the ATM network. Protocols such as IPX and
Appletalk, for example, can be filtered on the sending end. This is useful in
restricting your local Novell network or Appletalk data traffic from being
transmitted on long distance ATM links, thereby saving bandwidth and providing
security.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 115
To configure source protocol filtering, follow these steps:
1 From the Bridge Configuration menu, select [2] Source Protocol Filtering to display
the Source Protocol Filter menu, shown in Figure 87.
Figure 87 Source Protocol Filter Menu
The current statuses of the source protocol filters are listed at the top of the menu.
Yes indicates that packets with that protocol will be rejected. No indicates that
packets with that protocol will be transmitted across the bridge.
2 Change the filter settings as desired by entering the number corresponding to the
filter you want to set and responding to the prompt that appears at the bottom of
the screen. The list at the top of the menu is updated to reflect your change.
For example, if you want to configure an IP filter, select [1] Set Filter IP. The
following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Enter Filter IP (1=No, 2=Yes):
Enter 2to configure an IP filter; the bridge will reject packets with IP (Internet
Protocol).
3 Select [3] Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu.
allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 88 Bridge Setup Menu
5 Select [1] Set Source Protocol Filter. The following prompt appears at the bottom
of the screen:
Enter Source Protocol Filter (1=Disable, 2=Enable)
6 Enter 2to enable the source protocol filter.
Configuring Source Address Filtering
Source address filtering allows the bridge to prevent packets containing a specific
source address from traversing the bridge. You can use source address filtering to
prevent some stations from transmitting on the ATM WAN link. This type of
filtering is useful for preventing specific stations in a common protocol group on
the Ethernet LAN from transmitting bursty and useless network data across the
bridge and onto the WAN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 117
To configure source address filtering, follow these steps:
1 From the Bridge menu, select [3] Source Address Filtering to display the Source
Address Filter menu, shown in Figure 89.
Figure 89 Source Address Filter Menu
2 Select [2] Add Source Filter Address. The Add Source Address Filter screen appears.
This screen displays the following prompt:
Enter MAC Address (XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX or <CR>):
3 Enter the MAC address of the station from which you do not want packets to
traverse the bridge. After you make your entry, you are returned to the Source
Address Filter menu.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, as desired, to add more addresses to the source filter list.
n
n
n
To view the current list, select [1] List Source Filter Address from the Source
Filter Address menu.
To change an address in the list, delete the incorrect address and add the
correct address.
To delete an address from the list, select [3] Delete Source Filter Address from
the Source Filter Address menu and enter the number corresponding to the
address you want to delete. Then enter yat the confirmation prompt to delete
the selected address.
5 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu
menu allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured.
7 Select [2] Set Source Address Filtering. The following prompt appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Enter Source Address Filter (1=Disable, 2=Enable)
8 Enter 2to enable the source address filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Configuring Destination Address Filtering
Destination address filtering prevents LAN packets with destination addresses
specified in the filter from being sent to the WAN. You can use destination address
filtering to prevent some stations from receiving data from the ATM WAN link. For
example, you can save network-traffic-sensitive stations (such as local file servers
and CAD servers) from unnecessary data coming from the WAN.
To configure destination address filtering, follow these steps:
1 From the Bridge menu, select [4] Destination Address Filtering to display the
Destination Address Filter menu, shown in Figure 90.
Figure 90 Destination Address Filter Menu
2 Select [2] Add Destination Filter Address. The Add Destination Address Filter
screen appears. This screen displays the following prompt:
Enter MAC Address (XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX or <CR>):
3 Enter the MAC address of the destination to which you do not want packets to be
sent across the bridge. After you make your entry, you are returned to the Source
Address Filter menu.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, as desired, to add more addresses to the destination filter
list.
n
n
n
To view the current list, select [1] List Destination Filter Address from the
Destination Filter Address menu.
To change an address in the list, delete the incorrect address and add the
correct address.
To delete an address from the list, select [3] Delete Destination Filter Address
from the Destination Filter Address menu and enter the number corresponding
to the address you want to delete. Then enter 2at the confirmation prompt to
delete the selected address.
5 Select [4] Previous Menu to return to the Bridge menu.
menu allows you to enable or disable the filters you have configured.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Ethernet Interface 119
7 Select [3] Set Destination Address Filter. The following prompt appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Enter Destination Address Filter (1=Disable, 2=Enable)
8 Enter 2to enable the destination address filter.
Viewing the List Forwarding Table
The List Forwarding Table is a current forwarding table for the bridge. To display
representative List Forwarding Table.
Figure 91 List Forwarding Table
The List Forwarding Table identifies the port on which a certain MAC address is
located. This can be an Ethernet port or an ATM VC. Using the information in the
List Forwarding table, the bridge knows where to send a MAC address when it
receives one. If the Ethernet port receives a packet, and the destination MAC
address is not in the List Forwarding table, the port broadcasts the packet—sends
it to all Vxs associated with that port.
The List Forwarding Table includes the following columns of information:
MAC Address—The destination MAC address.
Disp.—Disposition:
Bridge—The default disposition.
Flood—Flood the frame on all available VCs.
Filter—Drop this frame.
L_Static—Destination MAC address is in Bridge Static Table.
SRC_Address_Filtering—User-configured source address filter.
DEST_Address_Filtering—User-configured destination address filter.
Location— The port (slot and port number) on which the destination MAC
address is located.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Age—The age of the station address entry in the List Forwarding Table:
Permanent (indicating that the entry is on the Bridge Static Table) or a specified
number of seconds. To specify the age, change the Aging Timer setting on the
for details. The system uses the Age parameter to delete station address entries
when they have had no traffic for the specified period of time.
Constructing the Bridge Static Table
The Bridge Static Table is a list of destination MAC addresses that you want to
maintain in the List Forwarding Table and do not want to be purged by the aging
timer. The Disp. column for these addresses in the Forwarding Table reads L-Static
to indicate that they will remain in the Forwarding Table until they are manually
deleted from the Static Table.
To construct the Bridge Static Table, follow these steps:
1 From the Bridge menu, select [6] Static Table to display the Bridge Static Table
menu, shown inFigure 92. From this menu, you can view the Static table and add
and delete entries from it.
Figure 92 Bridge Static Table Menu
2 Select [2] Add MAC Address. The Add MAC address screen appears. This screen
displays the following prompt:
Enter MAC Address (XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX or <CR>):
3 Enter the destination MAC address that you want to add to the Bridge Static
Table. This address will not be purged when the List Forwarding Table is aged, and
the Age column on the List Forwarding Table will display Permanent for this entry.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, as desired, to add more addresses to the Bridge Static Table.
n
To view the current Bridge Static Table, select [1] List Static Table from the
Bridge Static Table menu.
n
To delete an address from the table, select [3] Delete MAC Address from Bridge
Static Table menu and enter the number corresponding to the address you
want to delete. Then enter yat the confirmation prompt to delete the selected
address from the Bridge Static Table.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CBR Module 121
Enabling and Disabling the Spanning Tree
Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1d) is a technique that detects loops in a network and
logically blocks the redundant paths, ensuring that only one route exists between
any two LANs. It eliminates the duplication of packets and provides fault tolerance
for resilient networks.
To enable or disable the Spanning Tree, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [3] Manage Bridge to display
the Manage Bridge menu, shown earlier in Figure 84.
2 From the Manage Bridge menu, select the number corresponding to the slot and
port combination for which you want to enable or disable the Spanning Tree. The
Bridge Menu for the selected slot/port combination appears, as shown earlier in
4 Select [1] Set Spanning Tree Operation. The following prompt appears:
Enter Spanning Tree Operation (1=Disable, 2=Enable):
5 Enter 1or 2to disable or enable the Spanning Tree.
Configuring the CBR
Module
The optional CBR module features three T1/E1 CBR ports and one serial port
(PathBuilder S330) or one T1/E1 CBR port and one serial port (PathBuilder S310).
Configuring the CBR module involves the following tasks:
n
n
n
Configuring the CBR T1/E1 port(s)
Configuring the CBR serial port
Configuring the CBR card
Configuring the CBR To configure the CBR T1-DSX/E1 port(s), follow these steps:
T1-DSX/E1 Port(s)
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
Selection menu. The CBR T1-DSX Configuration Selection menu is the same.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 93 CBR E1 Configuration Menu
3 Select the option corresponding to the port you want to configure ([1] Port 1, [2]
Port 2, or [3] Port 3). The CBR T1-DSX/E1Port Configuration menu for the selected
port appears. Figure 94 shows a CBR Port Configuration menu for an CBR E1 card.
For the PathBuilder S310, you can configure only one T1-DSX/E1 port on the CBR
module.
Figure 94 CBR E1 Port Configuration Menu (Unstructured Mode)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CBR Module 123
As shown in Figure 95, if you set the Port Mode to Structured Voice, you can set
additional trunk conditioning (TC) parameters on the CBR Port Configuration
menu.
Figure 95 CBR E1 Port Configuration Menu (Structured Voice Mode)
4 Set the following port configuration parameters.
LBO (T1-DSX only)—Line Build Out. LBO refers to the signal
generation/regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder S330/S310 and
the next crossconnect of FOTs (Fiber Optic Terminal system), in feet: 1-100,
100-200, 200-300, 300-400, 400-500 or 500-600.
Line Code (T1-DSX only)—The zero code suppression technique configured to the
CBR T1-DSX port. Set this parameter to match the service provider or device
connection line coding. The default is B8ZS. The Line Code must match at local
and remote ports.
AMI—Alternate mark inversion; a T1 (1.544 Mbps) carrier line coding format
whereby successive ones (marks) are alternately inverted.
B8ZS—Binary 8 Zero Substitution; a T1 (1.544Mbps) carrier line coding format
used to accommodate “ones density” for clear channel transmission.
The Line Code for CBR E1 ports is a read-only parameter and is always set to
HDB3.
Port Mode—The type of service configured to the specified port:
Both Structured Data and Structured Voice modes allow end to end DS0
connectivity.
For PRI (Primary Rate Interface) signaling, you must set the Port Mode to
Structured Voice.
Structured Data — Structured service provides N x 64 kbit/second capability,
where N ranges between 1 and the maximum number of available DS0
channels. Structured data service passes traffic with signaling information
disabled—it provides for DS0 midspan carrier access without A & B signaling
bits terminating DS1 or E1 framing at the CBR T1-DSX or CBR E1 interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Structured Voice — Structured service provides N x 64 kbit/second capability,
where N ranges between 1 and the maximum number of available DS0
channels. Structured voice service passes traffic with signaling information
enabled—it provides for DS0 midspan carrier access with A & B signaling bits
terminating DS1 or E1 framing at the CBR T1-DSX or CBR E1 interface.
In structured voice mode, you can build either structured voice or structured
data virtual circuits.
Unstructured — Unstructured service provides T1-DSX or E1 frame tunneling;
it allows the application to utilize the entire available bandwidth at a bit rate of
1.544 (T1) or 2 (E1) Mbps. T1-DSX framing is optional in this service mode.
Framing—The type of frame organization configured for the T1-DSX or E1 port
interface: D4 or ESF for the CBR T1-DSX module; G.704 for the CBR E1 module.
Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection framing. The
Framing must match at local and remote ports.
CAUTION: A framing mismatch can cause LOF, OOF alarm conditions and result in
traffic loss.
TC Signaling Type (Structured Voice mode only)—The trunk condition signaling
type: PLAR, E&M/PLAR, FXS, FXO, FXS-GroundStart, or FXO-GroundStart. This is
the type of signaling done between PBXs. This also sets the signaling type used for
each of the virtual circuits across this port.
For PRI signaling, you must set the TC Signaling Type to PLAR when the port is
configured for structured voice.
TC1 Signaling Bits / TC2 Signaling Bits (Structured Voice mode only)—Trunk
condition 1 and trunk condition 2 signaling bits: onhook or offhook. The default
for TC1 Signaling Bits is onhook, while the default for TC2 Signaling is offhook.
The default values are usually suitable for PBX applications, but for channel bank
applications you should set TC2 Signaling Bits to onhook. For further details about
Timing—The type of input clock service configured for the port interface. The
default is System. The SRTS and Adaptive options are normally used for voice
applications—SRTS for unstructured voice applications and Adaptive for structured
voice applications.
System—Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing
source.
Loop—Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the
timing source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select Loop if the
T1-DSX port is used for the network/carrier service termination, in which case
the carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing source.
SRTS (unstructured ports only)—Synchronous Residual Time Stamp; a means
to measure the service clock frequency against a network-wide synchronization
signal. SRTS measures input frequency against the master network clock source
and adjusts the line rate by sending residual time stamps in the AAL1 header to
the remote end.
Adaptive (unstructured ports only)—A non-required network-wide
synchronization technique used to regenerate the input service clock. Adaptive
timing uses a buffer depth indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate: the
fuller the buffer, the faster the line rate; the emptier the buffer, the slower the
line rate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CBR Module 125
Figure 96 CBR T1-DSX Timing Options
Send Difference (-5 Hz)
AAL Header
Reference - 5 Hz
DS1
-5 Hz
Reference Check
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS)
DS1
AAL 1
Clock
> <
Depends
on Buffer
Buffer
Adaptive
Idle Timer—This parameter applies to the video dial feature. Use it to set the
length of time, in seconds (6-60) after which the CBR software shuts off cell
transmission and puts the virtual circuit into a listening mode if no cells have been
received on a T1-DSX/E1 port connected to an MCU device. If a T1-DSX/E1 port is
connected to an MCU device, the bandwidth allocated to the virtual circuits must
be saved when a video conference is not in progress. To accomplish this, the CBR
software starts an internal timer when no cell is being received. If the amount of
time you specify as the Idle Timer expires before another cell is received, the
software shuts off cell transmission and puts the virtual circuit into a listening
mode.
DBA Bits Mask (Structured Data ports only)—Dynamic bandwidth allocation bits
mask; a numeric code, in the range 1-255, representing a mask that masks off bits
that are not a portion of the idle code. When a DSX-1/E-1 CBR port is configured
as structured data, all virtual circuits in the port use a preselected DBA Bits Mask.
The decimal number that represents the DBA Bits Mask corresponds to an internal
8-bit value. The default DBA Bits Mask is 127.
The DBA Bits Mask parameter is designed to accommodate situations in which the
PathBuilder S330/S310 must communicate with equipment that uses
non-standard signaling patterns. In most cases you should leave this parameter set
to its default value. If you are experiencing problems with a CCS circuit, however,
you may need to set the DBA Bits Mask to a different value. The PathBuilder
S330/S310 performance monitoring feature reports the data bytes to the cell bus
on the CBR port. You can check this statistic to determine if you need to set a
non-default DBA Bits Mask. For details, see “CBR ATM Statistics” in Chapter 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
CRC-4 (E1 only)—Enables (yes) or disables (no) Cyclic Redundancy Check 4
(CRC-4) information. CRC-4 is a framing option that checks for errors in data. It is
a communication check for parity/framing and is used for performance monitoring
in E1 networks. CRC4 can be enabled only in structured and multi-frame mode.
Admin Status—Administrative status: Out of Service or In Service.
5 Select [10] Previous Menu to return to the CBR T1-DSX or CBR E1 Configuration
Selection menu.
6 Repeat steps 3and 4 for the other CBR T1-DSX or CBR E1 ports you want to
configure.
DS0 Trunk Conditioning
When the PathBuilder S330 is powered up, all DS0 channels on the T1 are trunk
conditioned, six DS0s at a time. This trunk conditioning readies the PBX for voice
communication. It is performed using TC1 signaling bits first and then TC2
signaling bits. The trunk conditioning stays in the each state (TC2 then TC3) for
one second. The DS0s that are not assigned to a PBC stay trunk conditioned,
forcing the PBX not to use them.
If there is an alarm state or any error condition that will impact traffic, the affected
DS0 channels are trunk conditioned using TC1 signaling bits first, and then TC 2
signaling bits. The trunk conditioning stays in the each state (TC1 then TC2) for
one second. This trunk conditioning prevents calls from being placed over a bad
line.
Configuring the CBR To configure the CBR serial port, follow these steps:
Serial Port
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
T1-DSX or CBR E1 Configuration Selection menu appears, as shown in above in
3 Select [4] Port 4 (V.35) to display the CBR T1-DSX/E1 V35 Configuration menu.
Configuration menu is the same.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the CBR Module 127
Figure 97 Configuring the CBR Serial Port
4 Set the following port configuration parameters as desired:
SCT Clock Source—The type of input clock service configured for the port
interface.
Recovered—A non-required network-wide synchronization technique used to
regenerate the input service clock. Adaptive timing uses a buffer depth
indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate: the fuller the buffer, the faster
the line rate; the emptier the buffer, the slower the line rate.
Internal—Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing
source.
SCR Clock Source—The type of output clock service configured for the port
interface.
Internal—Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing
source.
Adaptive—A non-required network-wide synchronization technique used to
regenerate the input service clock. Adaptive timing uses a buffer depth
indicator at the receiver to adjust the line rate: the fuller the buffer, the faster
the line rate; the emptier the buffer, the slower the line rate.
SCTE Clock Source—The Rx timing source for the serial interface: Echo Clock
from DTE or DCE Transmit Clock.
SCTE Clock Phase Control—Receive timing phase control. This parameter applies
only when the attached cable is DCE type cable. Depending on the speed of the
device application and the clock phases, particularly those of the return clock, you
may have to set SCTE Clock Phase Control to Inverted (invert the clock) to ensure
correct clock and data phase.
Normal—The receive timing from the remote endpoint (node) is normal
clocking.
Inverted—The receive timing from the remote endpoint (node) is inverted
clocking.
56K/64K Mode—The T1 DSU/CSU mode to be emulated: 56k Mode (n x 56) or
64k Mode (n x 64).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Dial Timer—The amount of time, in seconds, after which dialing is assumed to be
ended if no further digits have been received: 6-60. This parameter applies to the
video dial feature. The RS-366 specification does not require all calls to be ended
with the EON (End of Number) digit. If no EON is available, the CBR software uses
the Dial Timer to determine when dialing is complete. The CBR software resets the
timer each time a digit is received. When the timer expires, the dialing is assumed
to be completed, and the RS-366 driver forwards the call to the call handling task
for further processing.
When used alone, the CBR V.35 interface is used in the lease line environment,
and all of the interface signals are forced to on. When used with RS-366, the CBR
V.35 interface is used in a switched environment. The DSR and CTS&DCD options
allow you to emulate the switched environment by specifying that certain
interface signals should go off in alarm conditions.
DSR Option—Specifies the behavior of the DSR interface signal:
Forced On—Force the DSR signal to on in all conditions.
Follow DTR—Direct the DSR signal to follow the DTR signal.
Toggle—Toggle the DSR signal off for three seconds and then to on after the
DSC goes off.
CTS&DCD Option—Specifies the behavior of the CTS and DCD interface signals:
Forced On—Force the CTS and DCD signals to on in all conditions.
Follow DTR—Direct the CTS and DCD signals to follow the DTR signal.
Follow DTR & DSC—Direct the CTS and DCD signals to follow the DTR and
DSC signals.
Admin. Status—Administrative status: In Service or Out of Service.
Configuring the CBR The only type of configuration you can perform on the T1/E1 UNI card is to put it
Card in service or out of service.
To put the T1/E1 UNI card in service or out of service, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
T1-DSX or CBR E1 Configuration Selection menu appears, as shown earlier in
3 Select [5] Card Configuration to display the CBR Card Configuration menu.
Figure 98 shows the CBR E1 Card Configuration menu. The CBR t1-DSX Card
Configuration menu is the same.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Voice Compression Module 129
Figure 98 CBR Card Configuration Menu
4 Select [1] Set Admin Status and enter 2to put the CBR card in service or 1to take
it out of service.
Configuring the Voice
Compression Module
The optional Voice Compression module (VCM) consists of one T1/E1 interface
which you connect to a PBX trunk. The T1/E1 interface’s 24/31 DS0 channels can
carry individual voice, fax, modem, or data connections—or you can bundle
multiple DS0s to provide connections for high-rate applications such as video
conference or multiple-link PPP. For CCS, a DS0 is used as an ISDN D-channel for
carrying signal messages.
Configuring the VCM involves the following tasks:
n
n
n
Configuring the channels
Configuring the T1/E1 port
Configuring the VCM card
The following subsections describe these tasks. For details about configuring
Configuring VCM DS0 To configure VCM DS0 channels, follow these steps:
Channels
[1] Channel Configuration.
The following prompt appears:
Enter Channel (1-8):
2 Enter the number of the channel you want to configure.
After you enter the channel number, the VCM Channel Configuration menu
opens. Figure 99 shows a representative VCM Channel Configuration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 99 VCM Channel Configuration Menu
3 Set the following channel configuration parameters:
Encoding—Encoding scheme: A-law (United States) or Mu-law (international).
Voice Coding—Voice compression algorithm: Clear data, 64kbps PCM, 40kbps
ADPCM, 32kbps ADPCM, 24kpbs ADPCM, 16kbps ADPCM, or 8kbps G.729A.
Silence Compression—Enable (On) or disable (Off) silence compression and
comfort noise injection. If you enable Silence Suppression, the system will
automatically insert comfort noise when it detects silence in the voice
transmission.
Echo Cancellation—Enable (On) or disable (Off) echo cancellation. If you enable
Echo Cancellation, the DSP will perform up to 16ms echo cancellation.
DTMF Relay—Enable (On) or disable (Off) DTMF Relay. If you enable DTMF Relay
the Voice Compression module sends DTMF using a different packet. If you disable
DTMF Relay, the Voice Compression module simply compresses the voice signal.
FAX Support—Enable (On) or disable (Off) FAX relay. If you set FAX Support to
On, the system modulates and demodulates the fax and transfers fax data.
4 Select [7] Apply Setting to Channel(s) to apply your settings to one or more
channels. The following prompt appears:
Enter Channel(s) (1-8):
5 Enter the number(s) of the channel(s) to which you want to apply the settings. You
can enter a single channel, a range of channels (for example: 4-6), or a list of
channels separated by commas (for example: 4,5,6).
Configuring the VCM To configure the VCM T1/E port, follow these steps:
T1/E1 Port
1 From the Main menu, select [2] Configuration Management to open the
Configuration Management menu, shown earlier in Figure 50.
2 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to open the
List Card menu, shown earlier in Figure 51.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Voice Compression Module 131
3 From the List Card menu, enter the number corresponding to the slot in which the
VCM you want to configure is installed (7or 8) to open the VCM Configuration
menu. Figure 100 shows the VCM T1-DSX Configuration menu. The VCM E1
Configuration menu is the same.
Figure 100 VCM Configuration Menu
4 Select [2] Port Configuration to open the VCM Port Configuration menu.
Figure 101 shows the VCM T1-DSX Port Configuration menu. The VCM E1 Port
Configuration menu is similar.
Figure 101 VCM Port Configuration Menu
5 Set the following port configuration parameters.
LBO (T1-DSX only)—Line Build Out. LBO refers to the signal
generation/regeneration of the distance between the PathBuilder S330/S310 and
the next crossconnect of FOTs (Fiber Optic Terminal system), in feet: 1-110,
110-220, 220-330, 330-440, 440-550, 550-600 or 600+.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Line Code—The zero code suppression technique configured to the VCM
T1/E1port. Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection
line coding. The Line Code must match at local and remote ports.
AMI—Alternate mark inversion; a carrier line coding format whereby
successive ones (marks) are alternately inverted.
B8ZS (T1-DSX only)—Binary 8 Zero Substitution; a T1 (1.544Mbps) carrier line
coding format used to accommodate “ones density” for clear channel
transmission.
HDB3 (E1 only)—High Density Bipolar 3; an E1 carrier line coding format. To
transmit data and maintain synchronization, E0 transmitters use HDB3
encoding to replace runs of four consecutive zeros.
Framing—The type of frame organization configured for the T1-DSX or E1 port
interface: D4 or ESF for VCM T1-DSX; No Multiframe or Multiframe for VCM E1.
Set this parameter to match the service provider or device connection framing. The
Framing must match at local and remote ports.
CAUTION: A framing mismatch can cause LOF, OOF alarm conditions and result in
traffic loss.
Signaling—The signaling type configured for the VCM T1/E1 port: CAS (channel
associated signaling) or CCS (common channel signaling).
The TC Signaling Type, TC1 Signaling Bits, and TC2 Signaling Bits parameters are
applicable only when Signaling is set to CAS.
TC Signaling Type —The trunk condition signaling type: PLAR, E&M/PLAR,
FXO-Loop Start, FXS-Loop Start, FXO-Ground Start, FXS-Ground Start, or R2-E1.
This is the type of signaling done between PBXs. This also sets the signaling type
used for each of the virtual circuits across this port.
TC1 Signaling Bits / TC2 Signaling Bits—Trunk condition 1 and trunk condition
2 signaling bits: onhook or offhook. The default for TC1 Signaling Bits is onhook,
while the default for TC2 Signaling is offhook. The default values are usually
suitable for PBX applications, but for channel bank applications you should set
TC2 Signaling Bits to onhook. For further details about trunk conditioning, see
Timing—The type of input clock service configured for the port interface. The
default is System.
System—Configures the port interface to use the internal clock as the timing
source.
Loop—Configures the port interface to use the input port Rx clock as the
timing source; timing is received from the service “loop.” Select Loop if the
VCM T1/E1 port is used for the network/carrier service termination, in which
case the carrier (the service “loop”) typically provides the timing source.
CRC (E1 only)—Enables (With CRC multiframe) or disables (No CRC multiframe)
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) information. CRC is a framing option that checks
for errors in data. It is a communication check for parity/framing and is used for
performance monitoring in E1 networks.
Admin Status—Administrative status: Out of Service or In Service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 133
Configuring the VCM To configure the VCM card, follow these steps:
Card
Configuration to open the VCM Card Configuration menu. This menu lists
information about the VCM card and allows you to set the card’s administrative
status. Figure 102 shows a representative VCM Card Configuration menu.
Figure 102 VCM Card Configuration Menu
2 Select [1] Set Admin Status and put the VCM card In Service or Out of Service.
Configuring Virtual
Circuits
Once you have configured the PathBuilder S330/S310’s modules and ports, you
can start setting up virtual circuits. A virtual circuit is a bi-directional path between
data ports of connecting ATM units. You should have a circuit plan developed in
advance.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports both VPCs (virtual path connections) and
VCCs (virtual channel connections). A virtual path is an aggregate collection of
virtual channels for the purpose of assigning the channels to a single physical layer.
A virtual channel is a connection between data ports.
n
You define a VPC at the connecting units by assigning it a Virtual Path Identifier
(VPI) for each direction of transmission.
n
You define a VCC at the connecting units by assigning it a Virtual Path
Identifier (VPI) and a Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) for each direction of
transmission. You can connect one or more virtual circuits to a data port by
assigning each a different VPI and VCI. The VPI and VCI numbers are normally
assigned as a pair: VPI/VCI.
When you add a virtual circuit, you make a connection from the selected port to
for traffic to flow through the PathBuilder S330/S310 and across the ATM WAN
service. Typically, the VPI and VCI numbers for one side of the circuit are assigned
by the network service provider or local IS administrator—depending on whether
your network is a public or private ATM network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
The port VPI/VCI ATM circuit designators must match the application being
supported. For example, if an OC3/STM-1 multi-mode fiber module is installed in
the Side B slot of the PathBuilder WAN Access Switch and is connected to a LAN
ATM switch device, then the Rx VPI/VCI for the ATM LAN interface must match the
Tx VPI/VCI for the OC3/STM-1 UNI module and vice versa. This ensures the first
step in making the connection into the PathBuilder S330.
Supported Classes of The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports four classes of virtual circuits;
Virtual Circuits
PVC—Standard VP/VCC permanent virtual circuits connecting various type of data
ports. For details about setting up PVC virtual circuits, see “Adding PVC Virtual
RS366 Template—Video-associated virtual circuit templates. When the circuit
defined by an RS366 template is activated, it supports dialed video conferencing
over an ATM network. For details setting up RS-366 virtual circuit templates, see
VCM VCC—Voice Compression module VCC virtual circuits. VCM VCC circuits
carry individual voice, fax, modem, or data connections. For details about setting
in this chapter.
VCM Subchannel—Voice Compression module subchannel circuits. VCM
subchannel circuits carry multiple voice samples from a single DS0 and/or voice
samples from multiple DS0s, thereby providing connections for high-rate
applications such as video conference or multiple-link PPP. For details about setting
up subchannel circuits, see “Adding VCM Subchannel Circuits” later in this
chapter.
Adding Virtual Circuits To define a virtual circuit, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [2] Manage Circuit to display
the Virtual Circuit Menu, shown in Figure 103.
Figure 103 Virtual Circuit Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 135
2 Select [2] Add Virtual Circuit. The Add Virtual Circuit screen appears as shown in
Figure 104 Initial Add Virtual Circuit Screen
3 Enter a description for the virtual circuit you are defining.
We recommend that you do not use the description <366 call>. This is the
default description that the system assigns to video virtual circuits when they are
activated.
appears at the top of the screen, and a prompt at the bottom of the screen asks
you to select the virtual circuit class: PVC, RS366 Template, VCM VCC, or VCM
Figure 105 Selecting the Virtual Circuit Class:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
4 Enter the number corresponding to the class of virtual circuit you want to define.
n
n
n
n
If you want to create a standard VPC/VCC permanent virtual circuit to connect
If you want to create a virtual circuit to support video conferencing, select
If you want to create a VCC virtual circuit to connect VCM ports, select
If you want to create a VCM subchannel circuit that bundles multiple DS0s,
Adding PVC Virtual To configure a VPC/VCC virtual circuit to connect data ports, follow these steps:
Circuits
1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type, as shown earlier in
As shown in Figure 106, you are prompted to select a virtual circuit type.
Figure 106 Selecting the PVC Virtual CIrcuit Type: VCC or VPC
2 Enter the number corresponding to the type of virtual circuit you want to
configure:
VCC (virtual channel connection)—You can use this connection type for circuit
between non-UNI and UNI cards and between UNI and UNI cards; both the VPIs
and the VCIs will be translated.
VPC (virtual path connection)—You can use this connection type only for circuits
between UNI and UNI cards; only the VPIs will be translated.
To operate a circuit as a VP, set the connection type to VPC.
A screen appears, listing the PathBuilder S330/S310 modules and ports by slot
number and prompting you to select a slot for side A, as shown in Figure 107.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 137
Figure 107 Selecting a Slot for Side A of the Virtual Circuit
3 Enter the slot number for the module that you want to define as side A of the
virtual circuit. For example, to assign the SIM card as side A, you would enter 5.
The default slot number is indicated by an asterisk. To select the default slot
number, simply press [Enter].
After you enter the slot number, the Add Virtual Circuit screen displays the
selected slot number and port type, lists the parameters you will enter for side A of
the circuit, and prompts you to set the first parameter. The parameters listed vary,
in this section, for parameter descriptions.
You can also create an in-band circuit between two nodes by defining the
PathBuilder S330/S310 MCPU—with its own IP address—as one side of the virtual
circuit. This enables you to manage a remote hub from a local network
details.
4 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen, pressing [Enter] after
each entry. Default values are listed in square brackets ([ ]) at the end of each
prompt.
Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter
them. You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted
in order to add a circuit. Press [Delete] to back up to a previous selection.
When you have entered a setting for each parameter, the Add Virtual Screen again
displays the list of PathBuilder S330/S310 modules and ports by slot number and
prompts you to enter a slot number for side B of the circuit, as shown in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 108 Add Virtual Circuit Screen with Side A Completed
Some parameters that appear on the Add Virtual Circuit screen may not apply to
the particular circuit you are configuring. The system skips any non-applicable
parameters and does not allow you to set them. In addition, certain parameters
may be displayed for information only; you cannot change these read-only values.
5 Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected
to the network for side B of the circuit.
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for side B of the circuit. After you enter the last parameter
for side B, the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Enter Admin. Status (1=out of service, 2=in service [2]):
7 Set the administrative status for the circuit. The following prompt appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Is the above information correct (y/n)?
VCC circuit. As shown in the figure, the following message appears at the bottom
of the screen:
VC has been added.
Press any key to continue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 139
Figure 109 Completed Data Port VCC Virtual Circuit
9 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu.
Configuring CBR Circuits for DBA
This section provides guidelines for configuring CBR circuits for various types of
dynamic bandwidth allocation (DBA)—both for CAS (channel associated signaling)
CBR port and virtual circuit parameters for these types of applications. For details
Table 25 CBR Port and Circuit Settings for CAS versus CCS
Parameter
Setting for CAS
Structured Voice
N/A
Setting for CCS
Port Mode
Structured Data
Port Data Bits Mask
Leave at default setting (127) in
most cases; for details see
“Checking the Data Bytes to
VC Payload Size/Type
VC Onhook Detection
VC Mode
Voice
Enabled
N/A
Set automatically when VC
Mode set to DBA
Set automatically when VC
Mode set to DBA
DBA for channels 1-23 (DSX-1)
or 1-15 and 17-31 (E1)
Normal for channel 24 (DSX-1)
or 16 (E1)
Checking the Data Bytes to Determine a DBA Bits Mask Setting CCS
monitors for voice activity. In most cases the default DBA Bits Mask (127) works,
but if you are having a problem with a CCS circuit, you can set the DBA Bits Mask
to monitor any bits. The unit will monitor the virtual circuit, and you can use the
activity reported on the channel (reported under CBR ATM statistics as Data Bytes
To) to determine the proper DBA Bits Mask. For details about checking the data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Configuring CBR Circuits for Structured Voice DBA (CAS) In structured
voice DBA, the CBR software reads the stored signaling bits and releases
bandwidth when it detects an on-hook (idle) condition. Use structured voice
circuits with DBA for CAS (channel associated signaling) applications.
To configure a CBR virtual circuit for structured voice DBA, follow these basic
steps:
1 Configure the CBR port as follows:
n
Set the Port Mode to Structured Voice.
n
Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application.
2 Configure the CBR virtual circuit as follows:
n
n
n
Set the Payload Size/Type to Voice.
Set Onhook Detection to Enabled.
Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application.
Configuring CBR Circuits for Clear Channel Signaling Due to rob-bit
signaling, each T1 DS0 channel can have only up to 56 Kbps of bandwidth.
To create a full 64 Kbps DS0 clear channel, follow these basic steps:
1 Configure the CBR port as follows:
n
Set the Port Mode to Structured Voice.
n
Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application.
2 Configure the T1 CBR virtual circuit as follows:
n
n
n
Set the Payload Size/Type to Data.
Set Onhook Detection to Disabled.
Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application.
Configuring CBR Circuits for Structured Data DBA (CCS) In structured data
DBA, the CBR software reads the DSO payload bytes and releases bandwidth
when it detects an on-hook (idle) condition. Use structured data circuits with DBA
for CCS (common channel signaling) applications.
To configure a CBR virtual circuit for structured data DBA, follow these basic steps:
1 Configure the CBR port as follows:
n
Set the Port Mode to Structured Data.
n
Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application.
2 Configure the CBR circuit as follows:
n
Set the Mode to DBA.
n
Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application.
The Payload Size/Type, Onhook Detection and Signaling Type parameters are set
automatically when you set the circuit Mode to DBA.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 141
Setting up a PRI PBX Tie Line PRI signaling is a type of CCS in which one
channel (24) is used to signal for the other channels (1-23). This is in contrast to
CAS in which signaling is done on all channels.
To set up a PRI PBX tie line, follow these basic steps:
1 Configure the CBR port as follows:
n
Set the Port Mode to Structured Data.
n
Set the other port parameters as appropriate for your application.
2 Configure the CBR circuits as follows:
n
n
n
For channel 24, set the Mode to Normal.
For channels 1-23, set the Mode to DBA.
Set the other circuit parameters as appropriate for your application.
Defining RS366 (Video) The RS366 video dial feature uses CBR virtual circuits to support dialed video
Virtual Circuit Templates conferencing over an ATM network. The feature works as follows:
n
To set up RS366 virtual circuit templates, you follow the same basic procedure
that you do to add PVC virtual circuits (see “Adding Virtual Circuits” for
details). The RS-366 (video) templates are identified as such when you select
Virtual Circuits”). Before you can make a video call, you must set up an RS366
virtual circuit template.
n
n
You can define as many templates as you want to connect to different
destinations.
When the phone number associated with a given template is dialed, the
PathBuilder S330/S310 software locates the template and uses it to create a
temporary virtual circuit to which it assigns the default description <366 call>.
A video connection is established either via the Manual Connect A Site menu, as
someone dials the phone number associated with the video circuit on a video
keypad.
n
Data for the video conference is transmitted and received over the
newly-created <366 call> circuit.
n
When the call is disconnected, the system deletes the <366 call> circuit, but
preserves the template upon which the circuit was based for future use.
For further details about video conferencing and information on setting up call
routing tables for point-to-point video conferencing (between remote PathBuilder
S330/S310 switches) and multi-point video conferencing (both between remote
PathBuilder switches and between a central PathBuilder S330/S310 and remote
PathBuilder S330/S310 switches) see “Video Conferencing” in Appendix B.
Since only one video virtual circuit is active at any given time, you must build
multiple video-associated virtual circuits—even though they use the same physical
port and T1/E1 channels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
To define an RS366 (video) virtual circuit template, follow these steps:
1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type, as shown earlier in
As shown in Figure 110, the screen lists the slot in which the CBR module is
installed, and you are prompted to enter that slot number.
Figure 110 Selecting the Slot for Side A of a Video Virtual Circuit Template
2 Enter the appropriate slot number.
The screen lists the Slot/Port/Card you have selected, and you are prompted to
enter the port number of the CBR module port from which you want to build the
video circuit, as shown in Figure 111.
Figure 111 Selecting the CBR Module Port for Side A of a Video Virtual Circuit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 143
3 Enter the desired port number.
n
If you are setting up point-to-point video conferencing (between remote
PathBuilder S330/S310 switches).
n
Enter 4to select the serial (V.35) port.
n
If you are setting up multi-point video conferencing (both between remote
PathBuilder S330/S310 switches and between remote PathBuilder S330/S310
switches and a central PathBuilder S330/S310 switch).
n
For the remote units, enter 4to select the CBR serial (V.35) port.
n
For the central unit, enter 1, 2, or 3to select one of the CBR T1-DSX/E1
ports.
The Add Virtual Circuit screen lists the parameters you will enter for side A of the
4 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen, pressing [Enter] after
each entry.
Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter
them. You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted
in order to add a circuit template. Press [Delete] to back up to a previous selection.
When you have completed side A of the circuit template by entering a setting for
each parameter, the Add Virtual Circuit screen displays a list of PathBuilder
S330/S310 modules that you can use for side B of the circuit template.
Figure 112 shows the Add Virtual Circuit screen with side A completed for a video
Circuit screen with side A completed for a virtual circuit template using a CBR
T1-DSX/E1 port.
Figure 112 Side A Completed for Video VIrtual Circuit Using CBR Serial Port
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 113 Side A Completed for Video VIrtual Circuit Using CBR T1-DSX/E1 Port
5 Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected
to the network for side B of the circuit template.
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for side B of the circuit template. After you enter the last
parameter for side B, the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Is the above information correct (y/n)?
7 Enter yto confirm your configuration. The following message appears at the
bottom of the screen:
VC has been added.
Press any key to continue.
Figure 114 shows a completed video virtual circuit template. When the phone
number 555-2345 is dialed, the circuit that this template defines will be activated.
Figure 114 Completed RS366 (video) Virtual Circuit Template
8 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 145
Adding Voice To configure a VPC/VCC virtual circuit to connect data ports, follow these steps:
Compression Module
VCC Circuits
You must configure at least one VCM VCC circuit before you can configure any
VCM subchannel circuits.
1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit type, as shown earlier in
A screen appears, listing the modules available to assign as side A of the virtual
circuit, as shown in Figure 108.
Figure 115 Selecting a Slot for Side A of a VCM VCC Virtual Circuit
2 Enter the number corresponding to the slot in which the Voice Compression
module is installed (7or 8) to assign the VCM to side A of the circuit.
The Add Virtual Circuit screen displays the selected slot number and port type, lists
the parameters you will enter for side A of the circuit, and prompts you to set the
3 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen, pressing [Enter] after
each entry. Default values are listed in square brackets ([ ]) at the end of each
prompt.
Your settings are added to list of parameters at the top of the screen as you enter
them. You must enter a setting for all the parameters for which you are prompted
in order to add a circuit. Press [Delete] to back up to a previous selection.
CAUTION: For voice compression circuits, select the Shaper Number
corresponding to the maximum shaper value (typically Shaper Number 15).
Make sure that Early Packet Discard is disabled (set to no) for voice compression
circuits.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 116 Configuring Side A of A VCM VCC Virtual Circuit
When you have entered a setting for each parameter, the Add Virtual Screen again
displays the list of PathBuilder S330/S310 modules and ports by slot number and
prompts you to enter a slot number for side B of the circuit, as shown in
Figure 117 VCM VCC Add Virtual Circuit Screen with Side A Completed
4 Select the slot number corresponding to the module by which you are connected
to the network for side B of the circuit.
5 Repeat steps 3and 4 for side B of the circuit. The following prompt appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Is the above information correct (y/n)?
circuit. As shown in the figure, the following message appears at the bottom of
the screen:
VC has been added.
Press any key to continue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 147
Figure 118 Completed VCM VCC Virtual Circuit
7 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu.
Adding VCM Subchannel To configure a VCM subchannel circuit, follow these steps:
Circuits
You must configure at least one VCM VCC circuit before you can configure any
VCM subchannel circuits.
1 When you are prompted to select the virtual circuit class, as shown earlier in
currently-configured VCM VCC circuits.
Figure 119 Selecting a VCM VCC to Use for a VCM Subchannel Circuit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
2 Enter the number corresponding to the VCM VCC circuit upon which you want to
base the subchannel circuit to open the VCM Subchannel Add Virtual Circuit
Figure 120 Configuring a VCM Subchannel Circuit
The VCM Subchannel Add Virtual Circuit screen lists the parameters for the
selected VCM VCC circuit and prompts you to configure the subchannel
parameters.
Make sure that Early Packet Discard is disabled (set to no) for voice compression
circuits.
3 Set the VCM subchannel circuit parameters, including the following:
DS0 Channel—The number of the DS0 channel you want to assign to the DLCIs
used by the circuit.
Since all subchannel values must be unique, it is easiest to use the same VCC and
DLCI and to increment the subchannel ID (SCID).
DLCI—Enter the number of the DLCI to be used for the circuit: 16-1023.
Messages appear at the bottom of the screen after you enter the DS0 Channels
and DLCI parameters, indicating that your entries have been accepted. If you do
not see such a message, the system has not accepted your entry.
SCID—Subchannel ID; the ID number of the subchannel you want to assign to the
DS0s used by the circuit: 4-255.After you have entered the subchannel
parameters, the following prompt appears at the bottom of the screen:
Is the above information correct (y/n)?
The DLCI and SCID numbers must match for the local PathBuilder S330/S310 and
the remote PathBuilder S330/S310.
4 Enter yto confirm your configuration. shows a completed VCM subchannel
circuit. As shown in the figure, the following message appears at the bottom of
the screen:
VC has been added.
Press any key to continue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 149
Figure 121 Completed VCM Subchannel Circuit
5 Press any key to return to the Virtual Circuit menu.
VCM Subchannel Virtual Circuit Example
The following example shows how you can set up a three-node VCM network by
creating all required VCM VCC circuits and VCM subchannel circuits. Figure 122
illustrates this setup.
Figure 122 Three-Node VCM Network and Associated Virtual Circuits
PBX-1
S330 A
S330 A to S330 B
4 subchannel circuits:
S330 A to S330 C
4 subchannel circuits:
DS0: 1-4
DLCI: 16
SCID: 11-14
DS0: 5-8
DLCI: 17
SCID: 11-14
ATM
Network
VC1
VC2
S330 C to S330 A
4 subchannel circuits:
S330 B to S330 A
4 subchannel circuits:
DS0: 1-4
DLCI: 17
SCID: 11-14
DS0: 1-4
DLCI: 16
SCID: 11-14
PBX-2
S330 B
S330 C
PBX-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
For the purposes of this example, assume you want to make the following
connections:
n
Connect subchannels 1-4 on PBX-1 to subchannels 1-4 on PBX-2
Connect subchannels 5-8 on PBX-1 to subchannels 1-4 on PBX-3.
n
You need to build the following VCM VCC and subchannel circuits:
At PathBuilder S330 A (S330 A):
n
n
n
Add a virtual circuit (VC 1) between S330 A and S330 B.
Add a virtual circuit (VC 2) between S330 A and S330 C.
Add four subchannel circuits to VC 1, setting the VCM circuit parameters as
follows:
n
n
n
DS0: 1-4
DLCI:16
SCID: 11-14
n
Add four subchannel circuits to VC 2, setting the VCM circuit parameters as
follows:
n
n
n
DS0: 5-8
DLCI:17
SCID: 11-14
At PathBuilder S330 B (S330 B):
n
Add a virtual circuit (VC 1) between S330 B and S330 A.
n
Add four subchannel circuits to VC 1, setting the VCM circuit parameters as
follows:
n
n
n
DS0: 1-4
DLCI:16
SCID: 11-14
At PathBuilder S330 C (S330 C):
n
Add a virtual circuit (VC 2) between S330 C and S330 A.
n
Add four subchannel circuits to VC 2, setting the VCM circuit parameters as
follows:
n
n
n
DS0: 1-4
DLCI:17
SCID: 11-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 151
Virtual Circuit The following subsections describe parameters you must enter when you
Parameters configure virtual circuits for different port types.
Common VIrtual Circuit Parameters
The following parameters are common to most port types:
Slot/Port or Group/Card—The slot number, port or IMA group number, and card
type.
Shaper Number—The number corresponding to the SAR shaper you want to
assign to this circuit. You define the fifteen available shapers from the MCPU
details.
Priority—The priority level: high or low (MCPU, OC3/STM-1, QSIM/HSIM/FAM,
Ethernet, CBR, VCM); high, medium, low1, or low2 (T1/E1 UNI).
Early Packet Discard—Enables (yes) or disables (no) early packet discard. For
every connection where early packet discard is enabled, a status is kept when
there is a partial packet for that connection in the queue. Once the queue cell level
exceeds the Congestion On thresholds, only connections with partial packets
already existing in the queue are allowed in. Cells from other connections are
dropped. Once the congestion has subsided to the Congestion Off level, then all
remaining connections are allowed.
CAUTION: Do not enable early packet discard for AAL1 traffic.
MCPU Virtual Circuit Parameters
IP Address—The IP address for the PathBuilder S330/S310.
Subnet Mask—The subnet mask for the PathBuilder S330/S310.
T1/E1 UNI Port Virtual Circuit Parameters
Receive VPI/VCI—The VPI/VCI of cells received by the T1/E1 port.
Transmit VPI/VCI—The transmit VPI/VCI of cells transmitted by the T1/E1 port.
OC3/STM-1 Port Virtual Circuit Parameters
Receive VPI—The VPI of cells received by the OC3/STM-1 port.
Transmit VPI/VCI—The transmit VPI/VCI of cells transmitted by the OC3/STM-1
port.
Serial Port Virtual Circuit Parameters
You build connections from the local Ethernet port to a remote Ethernet port by
adding Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs). These connections allow the packets to
be transmitted through the ATM network to the destination port.
The parameters that appear on the Add Virtual Circuit screen vary, depending on
the configuration of the serial port that is being connected: Frame Relay, DXI, or
SDLC.
The configuration of the card you select on the List Card menu sets the attribute
selection for the virtual circuit configuration parameters. If you configure a virtual
circuit and then change serial port attributes—from DXI to Frame Relay or vice
versa—the circuit will be deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Frame Relay Virtual Circuit Parameters If the serial port is configured as a
Frame Relay port, you must set the following virtual circuit parameters in addition
to the common Shaper Number, Priority, and Early Packet Discard parameters:
Interworking Mode—The Frame Relay/ATM interworking mode: Network or
Service.
Start/End Frame Relay DLCI—The starting and ending Frame Relay data link
connection identifiers: 16...991. These DLCIs are used to identify a Frame Relay
local connection. This parameter applies only if the Interworking Mode is set to
Network.
Encapsulation Mode—The encapsulation data goes around the data packet and
is used to identify the packet; enter 1(Transparent) or 2(Translation).
Transparent—This mode is used for point-to-point frame relay
Interworking for this is being implemented. There are two modes at which
FRF.8 specifies a mode which is transparent and is in fact 1490 over ATM.
Translation—This mode is used in cases when you have ATM devices that do
not support 1490 as a protocol across their ATM trunks; for example, when
you have a PathBuilder S330/S310 terminating the ATM network at one end
and an ATM-ready device, such as a router with an OC-3 UNI, at the other end.
Typically these ATM-ready devices do not support 1490 as a protocol across
their ATM trunks, so you have to do LLC_SNAP (1483) per FRF.8. Mode 1F does
1490 to 1483 translation. See Figure 124.
Figure 123 FRF.8 Transparent Encapsulation Mode
DLCI
DLCI
VCC
FRR
FRR
ATM
RFC 1490
RFC 1433 Encapsulated
RFC 1490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 153
Figure 124 Translation Encapsulation Mode
DLCI
VCC
ATM Router with FRR IWF
FRR
ATM
Translation
RFC 1483
RFC 1490
DE-CLP / CLP-DE—DE to CLP / CLP to DE mapping. DE to CLP defines the value to
which CLP will be set in outgoing ATM cells. CLP to DE mapping defines the value
to which DE will be set from incoming ATM cells in outgoing Frame Relay frames.
Direct—Mode 1 mapping; matches DE value to CLP value. When the serial
port is in this mode, it does not translate between Frame Relay (NLPID)
encapsulation, rather it send it straight through the ATM network, possibly
onto a Frame Relay network or device.
Always 0 —Mode 2 mapping, with the CLP field mapped to a constant value
of 0. Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion to either
the ATM or Frame Relay network. Mode 2 allows for translation between
NLPID and LLC-SNAP encapsulation. It is used when connecting a Frame Relay
device or network to a non-Frame Relay device or network. For example, if the
PathBuilder S330/S310 is connecting a router/FRAD over an ATM network
(public or private) and at the other site a router with an ATM OC3/STM-1 UNI is
connected to the WAN network, typically the router OC3/STM-1 UNI does not
support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that the packet can be
encapsulated to LLC-SNAP.
Always 1—Mode 2 mapping, with the CLP field mapped to a constant value
of 1. Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion to either
the ATM or Frame Relay network. Mode 2 allows for translation between
NLPID and LLC-SNAP encapsulation. It is used when connecting a Frame Relay
device or network to a non-Frame Relay device or network. For example, if the
PathBuilder S330/S310 is connecting a router/FRAD over an ATM network
(public or private) and at the other site a router with an ATM OC3/STM-1 UNI is
connected to the WAN network, typically the router OC3/STM-1 UNI does not
support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that the packet can be
encapsulated to LLC-SNAP.
Start/End FR-SSCS DLCI—The starting and ending Frame Relay data link
connection identifiers of the remote ATM Frame Relay host: 16...991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
FECN to EFCI Mapping—Defines the mapping of FECN incoming on Frame Relay
to the outgoing ATM cell PTI congestion indicator.
Direct—Mode 1 mapping; matches FECN to the PTI CN bit. When the serial
port is in this mode, it does not translate between Frame Relay (NLPID)
encapsulation, rather it sends it straight through the ATM network, possibly
onto a Frame Relay network or device.
Always 0—Mode 2 mapping. This option sets the EFCI field to ‘congestion not
experienced.’ Mode 2 is an operational method for indicating data congestion
to either the ATM or Frame Relay network. Mode 2 allows for translation
between NLPID and LLC-SNAP encapsulation. It is used when connecting a
Frame Relay device or network to a non-Frame Relay device or network. For
example, if the PathBuilder S330 is connecting a router/FRAD over an ATM
network (public or private) and at the other site a router with an ATM
OC3/STM-1 UNI is connected to the WAN network, typically the router
OC3/STM-1 UNI does not support NLPID and requires mode 2 mapping so that
the packet can be encapsulated to LLC-SNAP.
DXI Virtual Circuit Parameters If the serial port is configured as a DXI port,
you must set the following virtual circuit parameters in addition to the common
Shaper Number, Priority, and Early Packet Discard parameters:
(DFA) VPI—The virtual path indicator (VPI) number corresponding to the DFA
field: 0...15. This parameter defines the selected VPI for Mapping to/from the Port
card (Router) to the trunk.
(DFA) VCI—The virtual channel indicator (VCI) number corresponding to the DFA
field: 0...63. This parameter defines the selected VPI for Mapping to/from the Port
card (Router) to the trunk.
(DFA) VCI Range—The DXI virtual channel indicator range: 1...32. This parameter
defines the range of VCs starting from the one selected, in twos. and allows quick
input of multiple VCs.
SDLC Virtual Circuit Parameters If the serial port is configured as a SDLC port,
you simply set the common Shaper Number, Priority, and Early Packet Discard
parameters.
Ethernet Port Virtual Circuit Parameters
For Ethernet port virtual circuits you simply set the common Shaper Number,
Priority, and Early Packet Discard parameters.
CBR Module Virtual Circuit Parameters
The parameters that appear on the Add Virtual Circuit screen when you select the
CBR module to be a side of a circuit vary, depending on whether you select the
V.35 port or one of the T1/E1 ports. In addition to the common Shaper Number,
Priority, and Early Packet Discard parameters, you must set the following
parameters:
Port—The CBR module port number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 155
CDV Buffer Size—The Cell Delay Variation buffer size: 1-24 ms. Cell delay
variation refers to the spacing between cells. The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides
a buffer to account for cell delay variation and thereby prevent cell loss. If the cell
delay variation exceeds the size of the buffer, however, then you will lose cells. If
your cell loss counts are high, try setting the cell delay variation to a higher value.
Your service provider can tell you the maximum cell delay variation for your
service.
Cell Loss Integ. Period—The amount of time the system will wait before
declaring cell loss state.
Payload Size/Type—The ATM payload size and type. For ports other than
structured voice DSX-1 ports, this is a read-only parameter. For structured voice
DSX-1 ports, select Voice or Data.
n
Set the Payload Size/Type to Voice to configure a CAS (channel associated
signaling) channel for structured voice. For details, see “Configuring CBR
n
Set the Payload Size/Type to Data to configure a CBR circuit for clear channel
signaling. For details, see “Configuring CBR Circuits for Clear Channel
You can also set the Payload Size/Type to Data to configure CCS (common channel
signaling), but this is not the preferred method. The recommended method for
configuring CCS is to set the CBR Port Mode to Structured Data. For details, see
Onhook Detection—Enables or disables onhook detection. When you enable
onhook detection, bandwidth is automatically reallocated based on the detection
of an on-hook condition, as specified by the signaling type.
Signaling Type—The signaling application type: No Signaling, E&M/PLAR,
FXO-LoopStart, FXS-LoopStart, or FXO-GroundStart for CBR T1-DSX; R2 for CBR
E1. You can only modify this field in structured voice mode. In this mode, you can
select any signaling application type except No Signaling. If you try to set the
Signaling Type to No Signaling in structured voice mode, you will get an error. In
structured/unstructured data modes, the Signaling Type defaults to No Signaling
and cannot be modified.
V.35 Bandwidth—(serial port only) Speed (derived as n x 56/64K).
Phone (RS366 templates only)—The destination phone number for the
video-associated virtual circuit. You are prompted for this parameter only if you
have set Mode to Dial. When you enter this number, the system runs a duplication
check against the destination phone numbers that have already been entered. No
calling plan is enforced, and the length of the destination phone numbers you
enter for different virtual circuits can vary. When the destination phone number is
dialed—either automatically through the RS-366 interface or manually through
the terminal or SNMP interface—the virtual circuit is activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
DS0 Channels—(T1-DSX/E1 ports only) Telco channels: the associated DS0s which
have been assigned to the specified ATM VC connection. All available DS0
channels are automatically allocated in unstructured mode. In structured mode,
the DS0 channels are bit-coded, with each bit representing one DS0 channel. You
can assign DS0 channels in structured mode only. Channel conflicts within a T1/E1
port interface will result in an error.
If you are using CAS (channel associated signaling), you must build a virtual circuit
for each DS0 you will use.
Voice Compression Module Virtual Circuit Parameters
If you are configuring a VCM VCC circuit, you simply set the common Shaper
Number, Priority, and Early Packet Discard parameters. If you are configuring a
VCM Subchannel circuit, you must also set the DLCI, DS0 Channel, and
Subchannel ID (SCID). For descriptions of the VCM Subchannel circuit parameters,
VC and VP Address The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports VC and VP address translation on the receive
Translation VPI/VCI end of a circuit.
n
n
To configure VP address translation, set the receive VCI to * when you enter
the circuit address in the Add Virtual Circuit menu. This rule applies for all valid
values of VPI (0 to 255).
To configure VC address translation, set the VPI in the range 0 to 3, and set the
VCI to a value other than x.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 software automatically sets the VCI to 0 whenever you
select a VPI greater than 3 for the receive VPI, indicating that for values greater
than 3 for the receive VPI, the PathBuilder S330/S310 can build only VP
address-translated circuits. This is relevant only for the receive VPI/VCI end of the
circuit.
Viewing Existing Virtual You can view summaries of existing virtual circuits for the entire chassis or by port
Circuits or group.
Viewing Virtual Circuits for the Entire Chassis
To view a summary of existing virtual circuits for the entire chassis, follow these
steps:
1 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [1] List Virtual Circuits to open the List Virtual
Circuit Summary screen, shown in Figure 125.
shows a summary of all virtual circuits, with a virtual circuit number (VC#) assigned
to each.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 157
Figure 125 List Virtual Circuit Summary Screen
The List Virtual Circuit Summary Screen shows a summary of all virtual circuits,
with a virtual circuit number (VC#) assigned to each. It displays the following
information:
card—Card type.
s/p—Slot and port numbers (for side A and side B of the circuit)
Rx/Tx—Virtual circuit information specific to the card type. For example, for UNI
cards, these columns list the receive/transmit VPI/VCI (for side A and side B of the
circuit), while for CBR cards these columns list the DS0 channels.
Description—The description entered when the circuit was configured.
2 To view more detailed information about a specific virtual circuit enter the VC# of
the circuit you want to view from the List Virtual Circuit Summary screen to open
the List Virtual Circuit Detail screen. This screen displays the complete list of
parameters for both sides of the selected circuit.
Figure 126 shows a representative List Virtual Circuit detail screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Figure 126 List Virtual Circuit Detail Screen
Viewing Virtual Circuits by Port or Group
To view a summary of existing virtual circuits for a selected port or group, follow
these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [2] Manage Circuit to open the
Virtual Circuit menu, shown earlier in Figure 103
2 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [6] Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group to
open the Access VCs by Port/Group Selection menu, shown in Figure 127. This
menu lists the ports and groups on the chassis for which virtual circuits have been
defined and the number of VC sides associated with each port/group.
Figure 127 Access VCs by Port/Group Selection Menu
3 Enter the number corresponding to the port or group for which you want to view
virtual circuits to open the Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group screen, shown in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Virtual Circuits 159
Figure 128 Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group Screen
The Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group screen provides the same information as
the List Virtual Circuit screen. See “Viewing Virtual Circuits for the Entire Chassis”
earlier in this section for details.
To view detailed information about one of the listed circuits, enter the desired VC#
to open the Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group detail screen. This screen
provides the same information as the List Virtual Circuits Detail screen, shown
this section for details.
From the Access Virtual Circuits by Port/Group detail screen, you can:
n
n
n
Enter sto view statistics for the selected circuit.
Enter dto delete the circuit.
Enter mto modify the circuit.
Modifying Existing To modify an existing virtual circuit, follow these steps:
Virtual Circuits
1 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [3] Modify Virtual Circuit. The Modify Virtual
Circuit selection screen appears. This screen displays a list of existing virtual
circuits.
2 Enter the VC# of the circuit you want to modify.
The following prompt appears:
Enter Description (12 characters maximum): <circuit description>
where <circuit description> is the Description for the selected circuit.
3 If desired, change the circuit description by backspacing and typing over the
existing description; otherwise, press [Return] to change other circuit parameters.
4 Follow the prompts that appear at the bottom of the screen to modify the circuit
parameters as desired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Deleting Virtual Circuits To delete an existing virtual circuit, follow these steps:
1 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [4] Delete Virtual Circuit. The Delete Virtual
Circuit screen appears. This screen displays a list of existing virtual circuits.
2 Enter the VC# of the circuit you want to delete.
The following prompt appears:
Are you sure you want to delete VC# <VC number>
where <VC number>is the number of the selected virtual circuit.
3 Enter yin response to the confirmation prompt to delete the circuit.
When you delete a virtual circuit involving the CBR module in structured voice
mode, the DS0 channels associated with that circuit are trunk conditioned and can
details about trunk conditioning.
Managing the Video
Dial Feature
This section tells you how to manage video dial-up sessions and view the call
routing table.
Before you can establish video dial-up sessions, you must configure video virtual
this chapter.
You manage the video dial feature from the Manage Video Dial menu, shown in
To display the Manage Video Dial menu:
From the Configuration Management menu, select [4] Manage Video Dial.
Figure 129 Manage Video Dial Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Video Dial Feature 161
Managing Video Dial-up To set up, activate, and end a video dial-up session, follow these basic steps:
Sessions
1 Create virtual circuits between the appropriate PathBuilder S330/S310 units. This
effectively builds a call routing table.
earlier in this chapter.
2 Start the session either manually or automatically via the RS-366 interface. For
details, see “Starting Video Dial-up Sessions” later in this section.
3 End the session either manually or automatically via the V.35 interface. For details,
see “Ending Video Dial-up Sessions” later in this section.
Starting Video Dial-up Sessions
A video dial-up session starts (connects) automatically when someone dials a
number matching one of the numbers in the call routing table (one of the
numbers associated with an RS366 virtual circuit template) on a video keypad. You
create the call routing table by building virtual circuits between PathBuilder
S330/310 CBR modules. For details about building video virtual circuits, see
details about viewing the call routing table, see “Viewing the Video Call Routing
You can also start (connect) a video dial-up session manually. To do this, follow
these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [4] Manage Video Dial to
display the Manage Video Dial menu, shown earlier in Figure 129.
2 From the Manage Video Dial menu, select [2] Manually Connect (Dial) A Site to
connection status is displayed at the top of the menu.
Figure 130 Manually Connect A Site Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
3 Select [1] Set Destination Pone # and enter the phone number of the site to which
you want to connect.
4 Select [2] Set Connection. The session begins as soon as the software matches the
phone number you entered in step 3 to one of the numbers on the call routing
table (one of the numbers associated with an RS366 virtual circuit template).
Ending Video Dial-up Sessions
A video dial-up session ends (disconnects) automatically when the video call is
disconnected.
You can also end (disconnect) a video dial-up session via the PathBuilder
S330/S310 interface. To do this, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [4] Manage Video Dial to
display the Manage Video Dial menu, shown earlier in Figure 129.
2 From the Manage Video Dial menu, select [3] Manually Disconnect A Site to
display the Manually Disconnect A Site menu, shown in Figure 131. The
destination phone number for the current session and the current connection
status are displayed at the top of the menu.
Figure 131 Manually Disconnect A Site Menu
Check that a destination phone number and a current connection status of active
are listed at the top of the Manually Disconnect A Site menu. If there is no active
connection, your disconnect request will be rejected by the system.
3 Select [1] Set Disconnect to end the dial-up session.
Viewing the Video Call You build the video call routing table as you create video-associated virtual circuits
Routing Table between PathBuilder S330/S310 CBR modules. When you enter a number—either
from a video keypad or from the Manually Connect A Site menu—to start a video
dial-up session, the system checks the number you enter against the call routing
table and makes a connection if it finds a match.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Video Dial Feature 163
To view the video call routing table, follow these steps:
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [4] Manage Video Dial to
display the Manage Video Dial menu, shown earlier in Figure 129.
2 From the Manage Video Dial menu, select [1] Display Video Call Routing Table to
Each row in the video call routing table corresponds to a video-associated virtual
circuit (call) between PathBuilder S330/S310 CBR modules. The table provides the
following information for each entry:
Index—A unique number identifying this entry in the call routing table.
Dest Phone #—The destination phone number associated with this call.
Tx VPI/VCI—The trunk transmission VPI/VCI associated with this call.
Rx VPI/VCI—The trunk receiving VPI/VCI associated with this call.
Speed—The speed of the call, in kbps.
Status—The status of the call: idle or active.
Figure 132 Video Call Routing Table
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULES, PORTS, AND APPLICATIONS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS
AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
5
This chapter tells you how to access and manage SuperStack II PathBuilder S330
and S310 WAN access switch (PathBuilder S330/S310) system alarms, how to use
available loopbacks, and how to view performance statistics for the PathBuilder
S330/S310. It contains the following sections:
n
n
n
n
Managing System
Alarms
The PathBuilder S330 detects certain events and reports corresponding alarms and
traps to the NMS station(s). These events are categorized as major alarms, minor
alarms, and information. When an alarm occurs, an alarm indicator is displayed on
Viewing and Clearing To view a list of current alarms, follow these steps:
Current Alarms
1 From the Main menu, select [3] Fault Management to display the Fault
Management menu shown in Figure 133.
Figure 133 Fault Management Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
2 Select [1] Display Current Alarms to view a list of current alarms, as shown in
Figure 134 Sample Current Alarm Display
To determine whether or not an alarm-generating condition has been resolved,
clear the current alarms and recheck the Display Current Alarms screen, as follows:
1 From the Display Current Alarm screen, press [Esc] to return to the Fault
Management menu.
2 Select [2] Clear Current Alarms.
3 Enter yin response to the confirmation prompt to clear the current alarms.
4 Select [1] Display Current Alarms to return to the Display Current Alarms screen.
n
Alarm-generating conditions that are still present will regenerate alarms on the
Display Current Alarms screen.
n
Alarm-generating conditions that are no longer present will no longer generate
alarms on the Current Alarm screen.
PathBuilder S330/S310 This section lists the alarm messages, meanings of the alarm messages, and
Alarm Messages troubleshooting tips for the major errors reported from each of the PathBuilder
S330/S310 interfaces. It contains the following subsections:
n
n
n
n
n
n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 167
MCPU and CTX Module (System) Alarms
Table 26 MCPU and CTX Module (System) Alarms
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
Alarms Cleared
Current alarms have been
cleared by user.
Information only.
Card Config Failed Cannot upload configuration
data to a card.
Information only. Could indicate a
potential problem. You may need to
reset the card.
Card initialized.
Card initialized.
Information only.
Card Reconfig
Failed
Reconfiguration of the card
failed
Information only. Could indicate a
potential problem. You may need to
reset the card.
Card Reconfigured Card is reconfigured.
Information only. Could occur when
the card is plugged in or the system is
powered up.
Communication
Failed
Error during communication
between MCPU and a slot.
Replace the unit.
DS3/E3/OC3/CBR/
IMA/VCM Ref Clk
Failed
Interface clock has been
designated as the system clock, for other alarms such as
and the interface clock has
failed.
Check the physical connection. Check
LOS/LOF/LOCD. Check the physical
connection.
Fan #1 failed
Fan #2 failed
Fan #1 failed
Fan #2 failed
Replace the fan tray.
Replace the fan tray.
History Overflowed Alarm history table has
overflowed. Alarms will
Clear the history alarms table through
NMS or Telnet.
continue to be recorded but
will displace oldest alarms.
Id Prom Checksum The internal checksum on the Have the idprom replaced with the
Error idprom of the indicated card is correct version. The system takes no
incorrect.
action if it recognizes the proper card
ID.
Invalid DB Cardtype An unknown card type is
found in the database
Information only.
Login Failure
Failed log -in. Someone failed Information only.
to log in to the shelf three
successive times.
Loss 8KHz Ref
Clock
The system reference clock was Try reassigning the clock—especially to
lost.
internal.
New Card
Configured
Configuration data for a new
card is uploaded.
Information only. The card was not
stored in the database.
PWR Supply Failed Power supply has failed.
Replace the power supply with an
operating unit.
Queue 0 Over
Threshold
The congestion threshold for
Queue 0 was exceeded.
Check and correct VC connections.
Check and adjust VI shaper values.
Check and adjust incoming traffic
volume. Check for faulty IMA links
which may reduce traffic handling for a
group.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Table 26 MCPU and CTX Module (System) Alarms (continued)
Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps
Queue 1 Over The congestion threshold for
Check and correct VC connections.
Check and adjust VI shaper values.
Check and adjust incoming traffic
volume. Check for faulty IMA links
which may reduce traffic handling for a
group.
Threshold
Queue 1was exceeded.
Queue 2 Over
Threshold
The congestion threshold for
Queue 2was exceeded.
Check and correct VC connections.
Check and adjust VI shaper values.
Check and adjust incoming traffic
volume. Check for faulty IMA links
which may reduce traffic handling for a
group.
Queue 3 Over
Threshold
The congestion threshold for
Queue 3 was exceeded.
Check and correct VC connections.
Check and adjust VI shaper values.
Check and adjust incoming traffic
volume. Check for faulty IMA links
which may reduce traffic handling for a
group.
SAR Initialize Failure Problem with the SAR chip on Replace the unit.
the MCPU. MCPU SAR failed
initialization.
System Clock
Reverted
The system clock has reverted Information only. This alarm occurs
to a higher priority clock.
only if the Clock Mode is set to
Revertive on the System Clock
Configuration menu.
System power up
System is powered up.
Information only.
Information only.
Write Session Taken A super user has changed a
by Super User read-only session to read-write.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 169
Alarms Common to Several Interfaces
interfaces.
Table 27 Alarms Common to Several Modules
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
Alarm Indication
Signal(AIS)
An incoming alarm indication Check your locally connected
signal (AIS) indicates a LOS
problem is occurring on the
line upstream of the
equipment connected to this
port.
DS3/E3/OC3 equipment, or ask your
service provider to trace the source of
the AIS signal.
Far End Receive
Failure
The far end equipment has a
problem with the signal it is
receiving from the PathBuilder interface port and your service
Check for a defective cable between
the PathBuilder device network
device.
provider’s network interface unit. An
open transmit line can cause this
condition. Check the LBO setting of the
port.
FEAC Loopback
A DS3 overhead function that Check with your service provider to
allows the system to be
determine the reason for the loopback.
enabled or disabled for
responding to Far End Alarm
Condition commands from the
central office. When enabled,
the DS3 line loopback is put up
upon instruction from the
central office. The system
removes the loopback upon
instruction or after 15 minutes.
Idle Signal
The line has not been
provisioned for service. No data equipment, or have your service
will pass on a line with an idle provider check their equipment and
Check the configuration of the terminal
signal.
make sure it is provisioned for service.
In Band Loopback
A loopback is configured on
the port. Loopbacks are for
troubleshooting only and
should not be present under
normal operating conditions.
If you are not troubleshooting the port,
turn off the loopback.
Link Down
Link Up
Summary informational alarm Information only.
to indicate one or more alarms
on this link are active.
Summary informational alarm Information only.
to indicate all alarms on the
physical link are cleared.
Local Card
Loopback
A loopback is configured on
the port. Loopbacks are for
troubleshooting only and
should not be present under
normal operating conditions.
If you are not troubleshooting the port,
turn off the loopback.
Loss of Cell
Loss of cell
Check the reference clock source.
Compare parameters between local
and service provider end. Check the
physical layer.
Delineation(LOCD) delineation—possibly a
framing or timing problem.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Table 27 Alarms Common to Several Modules (continued)
Alarm Meaning Troubleshooting Steps
Loss of Signal(LOS) Cannot detect a signal at a
configured port. This alarm is
Check the cable between the interface
port and the service provider’s
applicable to DS3 UNI, E3 UNI, equipment/terminal equipment. Check
OC3/STM-1 UNI, DS1 IMA UNI, cable connections. Check transmit and
and E1 IMA UNI ports.
receive pairs for proper connection.
Check terminating equipment. Call
your service provider.
Network Card
Loopback
A loopback is configured on
the port. Loopbacks are for
troubleshooting only and
should not be present under
normal operating conditions.
If you are not troubleshooting the port,
turn off the loopback.
Network Line
Loopback
A loopback is configured on
the port. Loopbacks are for
troubleshooting only and
should not be present under
normal operating conditions.
If you are not troubleshooting the port,
turn off the loopback.
Out of Frame(OOF) The configuration settings on
Verify that the framing format
the port are not correct for the configured on the port matches the
line, or the port configuration framing format on the line. Check the
is correct, but the line is
port’s statistics report for evidence of a
experiencing errors that result bad line; bursts of LCVs could indicate
in an alarm.
a timing problem. If connected to local
DS3/E3/OC3 equipment, check that
equipment’s output level to make sure
it is not overdriving the input.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 171
DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms
ATM Forum required alarms are indicated by the notation ATM Forum (R-xxx),
where xxx is the required alarm number.
Table 28 DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
AFA Link Removal
Automatic Frequency
Check the removed link for the CRC
errors.
Adjustment - Link removed
from physical line group due to
error rate in CRC check of
T1/E1 exceeding user specified
rate for a given period of time.
Bad IMA ID
A link within the group has
Check the links for proper connection.
received an IMA ID from the far Reconnect if necessary.
end that is different than when
the group was initialized (and
from the other links in the
group). The link with the bad
IMA ID is probably
misconnected.
Bad Link ID
Each IMA group assigns a
Check the links for proper connection.
unique Transmit link ID to each Reconnect if necessary.
link in the group. This link ID
should match the Receive link
ID of the remote end IMA
device. This alarm means that a
link was operating correctly,
but then received a Transmit
link ID already assigned to a
previous link.
A Tx Misconnected alarm is
also generated.
Bad M
The far end frame size M has
changed in an IMA link.
Check to make sure the maximum
frame size is set to the same value on
the local and remote ends.
The maximum value for the
frame size on the local device’s
serial card must match the
maximum value for the frame
size of the connected device.
The link with the BAD M is
probably misconnected.
Bad Offset
Far end ICP cell offset has
changed in an IMA link.
Check the links for proper connection.
Reconnect if necessary.
Each IMA group assigns a
unique Transmit offset to each
link in the group. This alarm
means that a link was
operating correctly, but then
received a Transmit offset
already assigned to a previous
link.
A Tx Misconnected alarm is
also generated.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Table 28 DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
BAD SCCI
(3Com Patent
Pending)
Status and Change Control
Indication – the content of the Reconnect if necessary.
ICP cells has changed. The far
Check the links for proper connection.
end ICP cell SCCI in this link
does not agree with the SCCI
of the other links in the group.
Bad Symmetry
The far end group symmetry
has changed in an IMA link.
Remove the link and stop Tx and Rx
data.
Duplicated IMA ID An IMA group has received an Check for loops and check the IMA
IMA ID that has been received group configuration.
by a previous group. The
second group must have a
unique IMA ID.
Duplicated Link ID
Duplicated far end logical link Check the links for proper connection.
ID in this IMA group for this
IMA link.
Reconnect if necessary.
Each IMA group assigns a
unique Transmit link ID to each
link in the group. This link ID
should match the Receive link
ID of the remote end IMA
device. This alarm means that a
link received a Transmit link ID
already assigned to a previous
link.
Duplicated Offset
Duplicated far end ICP cell
offset in this IMA group in an Reconnect if necessary.
IMA link.
Check the links for proper connection.
Each IMA group assigns a
unique Transmit offset to each
link in the group. This alarm
means that a link received a
Transmit offset already
assigned to a previous link.
Some of the links are probably
misconnected.
Excessive Link Delay The link has exceeded the
user-selectable value for
Check the links for proper connection.
Reconnect if necessary. Also try
adjusting the link delay parameter for
the IMA group.
acceptable link delay.
The link is removed from the
group.
Group [n] Abort
Symmetry
Generated when Group [n]
Config. Abort is generated,
due to group symmetry
problem
Check and correct near end symmetry.
Only symmetric operation is supported
in PathBuilder products.
Group [n] Config
Abort
The near end node rejects the Check and correct the near end and far
far end IMA parameters. end parameters for compatibility.
ATM Forum (R-128)
Group [n] Degraded The IMA group is passing data Continue passing data. Correct faulty
Service
with less than the number of
IMA links you configured.
links or adjust IMA group
configuration.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 173
Table 28 DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms (continued)
Alarm Meaning
Group [n] Dup. IMA The same group IMA ID has
Troubleshooting Steps
Correct link or group configuration.
ID
been received on links
belonging to different IMA
groups in the same card.
Group [n] FE Abort The far end rejects the
Check and correct near end symmetry.
Symmetry
symmetry sent by the near end. Only symmetric operation is supported
in PathBuilder products.
Group [n] FE
Blocked
The far end reports it is not
passing data.
Check and repair link facilities. Verify
configuration.
ATM Forum (R-132)
Group [n] FE Config The far end rejects the M value Configure both ends to the same M
Abort
used by the near end.
value.
NOTE: This alarm should not occur if
both ends are PathBuilder S310, S330,
S600, or S700 products.
Group [n] FE Start
Up
The far end is coming up
(starting IMA).
Information about far end state.
ATM Forum (R-127)
Group [n] FE
Insufficient Links
The far end node is reporting
an insufficient number of links. configuration.
Check and repair link facilities. Verify
ATM Forum (R-131)
Group [n]
Insufficient Links
The near end finds not enough Check and correct any faulty IMA links.
available links.
Check and correct IMA minimum links
parameter.
ATM Forum (R-130) This occurs when the near end
has completed parameter
negotiation with the far end,
but is neither passing data nor
blocked.
Group [n] Lack of
Link
The near end is idling because Take the group down, and stop passing
it does not have enough links data in all links.
in an IMA group. This occurs
only after group parameters
are negotiated. When this
occurs, the “NE Insufficient
Links” alarm is also reported.
Group [n] Link
Down
Summary information alarm to Information only.
indicate one or more alarms on
this IMA group are active.
Group [n] Link Up
Group [n] N<P
Summary informational alarm Information only.
to indicate all alarms on the
IMA group are cleared.
There are fewer configured
links than IMA links required to
make an IMA group active.
Continue passing data.
Group [n] No Link
The near end has lost all its
If one or more links comes back,
links in an IMA group because re-identify the link(s) and renegotiate
these links have AFA, LOS, AIS, parameters with the far end group.
OOF, LCD, or missing ICP cells.
This invalidates all the far end
identity.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Table 28 DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
Group [n] Multi
IMA ID
Different group IMA ID
received on different links in an group configuration.
IMA group.
Correct link connections and/or IMA
Group [n] Multi Test Different test procedure
Use the test procedure from the lowest
request from different links in logical link and ignore the other test
ATM Forum (R-138)
an IMA group from the far
end.
procedures.
Group [n] Multiple Different frame lengths
Make sure that the IMA frame length is
M
received on different links in an set to the same value for all links.
IMA group.
Group [n] Multiple Different group symmetry
Configure the group to be symmetric.
Symmetry
received on different links in an 3Com PathBuilder products do not
IMA group (symmetrical versus support asymmetric bandwidth for
asymmetrical operation).
IMA.
Group [n] Time
Sync Fail
The far end transmit clocking
mode does not match the near (Common Transfer Clock) is supported.
end transmit clocking mode
Check configuration. Only CTC
If the far end transport clocking is set to
ITC (Independent Transfer Clock),
change it to CTC.
IMA Protocol
Mismatch
IMA label is not ATM Forum
1.0.
Near end and far end IMA protocol
versions do no match. Check and
correct incompatibility.
IMA Remote
Loopback
Far end loopback detected,
external cable loopback or
crosstalk.
Remove loopback condition.
IMA Tx
Misconnected
The near end IMA networking Remove the link and stop Tx and Rx
Tx or Rx link state machine
detects the link is not
connected to the correct FE Tx
or Rx links.
data.
ATM Forum (R-123)
Loss of Differential Relative time difference
Have your carrier verify the time synch
Synchronization
(LODS)
between individual T1s/E1s in and routing of individual T1s/E1s in the
the IMA group is out of range. group. Check the IMA group
configuration to ensure consistency on
ATM Forum (R-122) LODS is declared after the Rx
IMA fails to synchronize the
the local and remote ends.
IMA link(s) in an IMA group
within some time limit.
Loss of IMA Frame Loss of IMA Frame is detected Check the IMA group configuration to
(LIF)
in the Rx direction for an IMA ensure consistent frame size on the
link UP.
local and remote ends. Check links for
evidence of noise. Check to be sure
that AFA is enabled.
ATM Forum (R-121)
There is an IMA frame size
mismatch between two ends
of the circuit. This can be
caused by missing ICP cells
(ATM cells that carry protocol
information), bad IMA ID, bad
sequence number, bad M, bad
offset HEC error or CRC error
in ICP cells. This problem may
occur if the link gets noisy and
there is no AFA to prevent the
ICP from getting corrupted. It
is detected in hardware and
may or may not cause an
operational problem.
(continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 175
Table 28 DS1/E1 UNI Module Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
Port Missing ICP
Cells
Two consecutive ICP cells
missing from the IMA frame.
See also Loss of IMA Frame (LIF). This is
a specific cause of that alarm and will
also be reported.
RFI IMA
Remote Failure Indication: Far Correct T1 or E1 facilities error.
end IMA Rx networking link
state machines detected LOS,
ATM Forum (R-121)
OOF, AIS. LCD, LIF or LODS.
Test Pattern Failed An 8-bit pattern is sent to the Make sure that the same number of
remote node which must then links are configured and enabled on
echo it back on all ports. The
both ends of the IMA configuration.
local node checks the echoed Make sure that the configuration of
pattern and reports an alarm if both groups is the same. For instance,
cells from one or more of the
make sure that the payload scrambling
links fail to arrive. This alarm is setting is the same on both ends.
declared on all links which do
not reply or reply incorrectly.
Yellow Alarm
OOF alarm is detected. A
received remote alarm
indication means that the far
Connect an external loopback cable to
the port. If there are no alarms, the
problem is elsewhere. Check for an
end equipment has a problem open, short, or wiring error in the cable
with the signal it is receiving
from the PathBuilder device.
between the PathBuilder network
interface port and your service
provider's network interface unit, or
the terminal equipment. An open
transmit pair can cause this condition
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
DSX-1/E1 CBR Module Alarms
.Table 29 DSX-1/E1 CBR Module Alarms
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
Cellbus parity
Parity error on cells received
from cell bus.
Check VC and port configuration.
E1 Loss of CAS
Multiframe
E1 signaling multiframe
alignment has been lost.
Check the physical connection and the
carrier for configuration problems.
E1 Time Channel 16 All 1s in E1 time slot 16 for 2
Make sure both the local device and
the far end device are configured for
Time Slot 16 framing. If both devices
are correctly configured, there may be
a hardware problem in either device.
AIS Rcv
consecutive frames.
Far End E1 Loss of
CAS
The far end device has lost
Channel Associated signaling. end device.
Check the E1 configuration of the far
HP cellbus
congested
High priority cell bus
congested.
Remove high priority connections until
the configured bandwidth is less than
or equal to the total bandwidth on the
port. If you have over-subscribed the
port and all high priority devices are
using the connections, turn off some
devices.
The cell port has been
configured to pass more CBR
traffic than it can physically
handle. The aggregate
bandwidth of the CBR
connections exceeds the total
bandwidth of the port. This
alarm indicates that you either
mistakenly oversubscribed the
cell port with CBR connections,
or more connections than
expected are simultaneously
active. When this condition
exists on the HP cell bus, lower
priority cell busses will not be
able to pass traffic out.
LP cellbus
congested
Low priority cell bus congested. Remove low priority connections until
the configured bandwidth is less than
or equal to the total bandwidth on the
port. If you have over-subscribed the
port and all low priority devices are
using the connections, turn off some
devices.
MP cellbus
congested
Medium priority cell bus
congested.
Remove medium priority connections
until the configured bandwidth is less
than or equal to the total bandwidth
on the port. If you have over-
subscribed the port and all medium
priority devices are using the
connections, turn off some devices.
Receive FIFO
Overflow
Cells are being received from
the cell bus faster than the CBR that it has adequate bandwidth.
can process them.
Reconfigure the CBR connection so
SAR SRAM failure
(continued)
SAR SRAM failure (applicable
to CBR)
Replace the unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing System Alarms 177
Table 29 DSX-1/E1 CBR Module Alarms (continued)
Transmit FIFO
Overflow
The cell bus is congested, and The entire CBR connection must be
cells are backed up on the CBR. synchronous end-to-end. Make sure
the clock rates of the devices at either
Traffic at the output side of the
end of the connection match each
CBR port is being transmitted
other and match the transmit clock rate
more slowly than it is being
of the CBR ports on the PathBuilder
received from the cell bus. As a
device.
result, the output buffer is
overflowing. In general, the
problem is that the CBR
connection is not synchronized
end-to-end. The clock rate of
the output port does not
match the clock rate of the
device from which the traffic
originated.
VC RDI Receive
VC RDI (Remote Defect
Indication) OAM received in
the connection. The far end
Check for a defective cable between
the far end interface port and your
service provider's network interface
equipment has a problem with unit. An open transmit line can cause
the signal it is receiving,
this condition.
indicating that the problem lies
between the network provider
and the far end terminal
equipment for this connection.
SIM Alarms
Table 30 QSIM Alarms
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
LMI Link Down
The Local Management
Interface has taken the link
down.
Check the LMI protocol configuration
for the port.
Voice Compression Module Alarms
.Table 31 Voice Compression Module Alarms
Alarm
Meaning
Troubleshooting Steps
E1 Loss of CAS
Multiframe
E1 signaling multiframe
alignment has been lost.
Check the physical connection and the
carrier for configuration problems.
E1 Time Channel 16 All 1s in E1 time slot 16 for 2
Make sure both the local device and
the far end device are configured for
Time Slot 16 framing. If both devices
are correctly configured, there may be
a hardware problem in either device.
AIS Rcv
consecutive frames.
Far End E1 Loss of
CAS
The far end device has lost
Channel Associated signaling. end device.
Check the E1 configuration of the far
Channel PCM
Loopback
Condition
A loopback is configured on
the channel. Loopbacks are for channel, turn off the loopback.
troubleshooting only and
If you are not troubleshooting the
should not be present during
normal operating conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Working with History All alarms and information events are captured and kept in an alarm history file in
Alarms the PathBuilder S330/S310. This file can hold up to 300 events; it fills on a
first-in/first-out basis. We recommend that you routinely view the alarm history file
before events are lost. We also recommend that you print the file for comparison
with previous history files and entry into your maintenance log.
Viewing and Printing History Alarms
To view and print an alarm history, follow these steps:
1 From the Main menu, select [3] Fault Management to display the Fault
Management menu shown in Figure 133.
sample alarm history.
Figure 135 Sample Alarm History Display
If the history file cannot be displayed on one page, the Display History Alarm
screen will include a prompt to press [n] for the next page or press [p] for the
previous page.
3 Use the print screen or other printing feature of your NMS station to print out
each page of the history file.
4 Compare the printouts to your most previous records to see if there are any
obvious trends, such as more frequent alarms of a certain type, which might
require troubleshooting.
Clearing History Alarms
After you have printed the alarm history, you should clear the alarms so that they
will no longer take up space in the alarm history file. To do this, follow these steps:
1 Return to the Fault Management menu.
2 Select [4] Clear History Alarms.
3 Enter yin response to the confirmation prompt to clear the history alarms.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Loopbacks 179
Using Loopbacks
Loopbacks allow you to check circuit continuity between one point and another.
You should use the PathBuilder S330/S310 loopback feature to check continuity to
the nearest point first, and if the circuit is valid to that point, then loop to the next
point. If a circuit has been compromised, isolating the problem between two
points should help you identify and resolve the problem.
To access the loopback modes supported by the PathBuilder S330/S310, follow
these steps:
1 From the Main menu, select [3] Fault Management to display the Fault
Management menu shown earlier in Figure 133.
2 Select [5] Loopback from the Fault Management menu to display the Loopback
Figure 136 Loopback Menu
3 Select the card type for which you want to conduct the loopback.
The Loopback menu for the selected port appears. Figure 137 shows the
Loopback menu for the OC3/STM-1 port.
If you select a card type for which the PathBuilder S330/S310 does not support
loopbacks, a message appears, informing you that no loopback feature is available
for that card type.
If you select a multiple-port card, you must also select the port for which you want
to configure the loopback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Figure 137 OC3/STM-1 Loopback Menu
4 Select [1] Set Loopback. A prompt listing the loopback choices for the selected
port appears at the bottom of the screen.
5 Enter the number corresponding to the type of loopback you want to configure.
The following subsections describe the available loopbacks for each of the
PathBuilder S330 interfaces.
T1/E1 UNI Loopbacks The following loopbacks are available for the T1/E1 UNI interface:
Network Line—Loops the T1/E1 received data back on the output side after the
digital data has been recovered.
Local Card—Loops the transmit T1/E1 output on the receive side; the transmitted
data will continue to go on the output.
Network Card—Loops the T1/E1 received payload back toward the line output.
illustrates the loopbacks for T1/E1.
Figure 138 T1/E1 Loopbacks
T1/E1 Interface
Network Side
Network Card
Payload
Local
Line
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Loopbacks 181
OC3/STM-1 Loopbacks The following loopbacks are available for the OC3/STM-1 interface:
Network LIne—Loops the OC3/STM-1 received data back on the output side
after the digital data has been recovered.
Local Card—Loops the transmit OC3/STM-1 output on the receive side; the
transmitted data will continue to go on the output.
Figure 139 OC3/STM-1 Loopbacks
OC3 Interface
Network Side
Local Card
Network Line
Payload
DS3 Loopbacks The DS3 module supports the following loopbacks:
Local Card—Loops the transmit DS3output on the receive side. All cells coming
from the DS3 card are looped through the backplane and back to the DS3 card.
The transmitted data will continue to go on the output.
Network Line—Loops the DS3 received data back on the output side after the
digital data has been recovered.
Network Card—Loops the DS3 received cell payload back toward the line output.
Figure 140 DS3 UNI Loopback Options
DS3 Interface
Network Side
Bus Side
Network Card
Network
Line
Local Card
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
E3 Loopbacks The E3 module supports the following loopbacks:
Local Card—Loops the transmit E3output on the receive side. All cells coming
from the E3 port card are looped through the backplane and back to the E3 port
card. The transmitted data will continue to go on the output.
Network Line—Loops the E3 received data back on the output side after the
digital data has been recovered.
Network Card—Loops the E3 received cell payload back toward the line output.
Figure 141 E3 Loopback Options
E3 Interface
Network Side
Network Card
Payload
Local
Line
CBR Loopbacks The following loopbacks are available for the CBR module:
Network Line—Loops the T1-DSX received data back on the output side after the
digital data has been recovered.
Local Card—Loops the transmit T1-DSX output on the receive side; the
transmitted data will continue to go on the output.
Network Card—Loops the T1-DSX received payload back toward the line output.
Figure 142 CBR Loopback
CBR Interface
Network Side
Network Card
Payload
Local
Line
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Loopbacks 183
Setting VCM Loopbacks For the Voice Compression module, you can set both card/line and channel
loopbacks. When you set a VCM loopback, the MCPU sends a message to the
VCM card to perform a maintenance function, and the VCM replies with an
acknowledgment. When the VCM enters maintenance mode, it generates an
alarm to the MCPU. Only one maintenance function per port or per channel is
allowed.
Setting VCM Port Loopbacks
To set VCM port (card/line) loopbacks, follow these steps:
corresponding to the slot number in which the Voice Compression module is
T1-DSX menu. The VCM E1 menu is the same.
Figure 143 VCM Loopback Menu
2 Select [1] Set Port Loopback to open the VCM Card/Line Loopback menu. This
menu is similar to the OC3/STM-1 Loopback menu, shown earlier in Figure 139.
3 Select the option corresponding to the type of loopback you want to perform, and
set the loopback to On.
Local Card—Loops the transmit VCM output on the receive side; the transmitted
data will continue to go on the output.
Network Line—Loops the VCM received data back on the output side after the
digital data has been recovered.
Network Card—Loops the T1-DSX received payload back toward the line output.
Setting VCM Channel Loopbacks
To set VCM channel loopbacks, follow these steps:
corresponding to the slot number in which the Voice Compression module is
installed (7or 8) to open the VCM Loopback menu.
Loopback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
The following prompt appears:
Enter Channel (1-8):
3 Enter the number of the channel for which you want to set a loopback to open
the VCM Channel Loopback menu for that channel. Figure 144 shows the VCM
T1-DSX Channel Loopback menu. The VCM E1 Channel Loopback menu is the
same.
Figure 144 VCM Channel Loopback Menu
4 Select [1] Set Loopback. A prompt appears, listing the available types of channel
loopback.
5 Enter the appropriate number to select one of the following types of channel
loopbacks (or no loopback):
PCM Loopback——Loops digital receive to transmit toward the T1 port.
PCM Packet Loopback——Loops coder output to coder input toward the T1
port, using the DSP channel PCM packet loopback.
Network Packet Loopback——Loops coder input to coder output toward the
ATM network, using the DSP channel network packet loopback.
6 Select [2] Apply Setting to Channel(s).
The following prompt appears:
Enter Channel (1-8):
7 Enter the number(s) of the channel(s) to which you want to apply the settings to
set the specified loopback for those channels. You can enter a single channel, a
range of channels (for example: 4-6), or a list of channels separated by commas
(for example: 4,5,6).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 185
Viewing Performance
and ATM Statistics
This section tells you how to display the following types of PathBuilder S330/S310
statistics:
n
Card Statistics
n
Performance Monitoring screens lists statistics that reflect the physical
monitoring of the line. These screens display one of the following types of
data.
Current—The statistics being collected for the current 15-minute interval.
Interval—The statistics collected over the previous 24 hours of operations,
broken into 96 completed 15-minute intervals.
Total—The cumulative sum of the various statistics for the 24-hour period
preceding the current 15-minute interval.
n
n
ATM screens list statistics that monitor the ATM payload. These screens also
display the date and time of the last reset and allow you to clear the
currently-displayed statistics.
Port Activity screen (Voice Compression module) lists statistics that monitor
VCM port activity.
n
Virtual Circuit Statistics
Viewing Card Statistics To view card statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the main menu, select [4] Performance Management to open the
Performance Management Menu, shown in Figure 145.
Figure 145 Performance Management Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Figure 146 Card Statistics Menu
3 Enter the number corresponding to the card for which you want to view statistics.
The following sections describe the card statistics provided for each type of card.
Viewing T1/E1 UNI Card You can view T1/E1 UNI statistics for ports or for groups.
Statistics
To view T1/E1 statistics, follow these steps:
corresponding to the T1/E1 UNI module to open the T1/E1 UNI Performance
menu.
2 Select [1] Port/Link Performance Management to view port statistics or [2] Group
Performance Management to view group statistics.
3 Enter the number corresponding to the port or group for which you want to view
statistics.
4 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view.
n
Port statistics
n
n
n
PHY (Physical) Performance Monitoring
IMA Link Performance Monitoring
IMA Link ATM Statistics
n
Group statistics
n
Group performance
Group ATM
n
The following sections describe the statistics provided in each of these categories.
For performance monitoring statistics only, you must select the type of
performance statistics you want to view: current, interval, or total. For details
about these types of performance statistic, see “Viewing Performance and ATM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 187
T1/E1 Port/Link Statistics
This section describes the T1/E1 port/link statistics.
T1/E1 Port/Link Physical Performance Statistics
The T1 (DS1)/E1 UNI Physical Performance Monitoring screen displays the
following statistics.
You can view the statistics as current, interval, or total data.
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the T1/E1 interface.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the T1/E1 interface.
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
CSS—The number of controlled slip seconds (CSSs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
PCV—The number of path coding violations (PCVs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
LES—The number of line errored seconds (LESs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
BES—The number of bursty errored seconds (BESs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
DM—The number of degraded minutes (DM) encountered by the T1/E1 interface.
LCV—The number of line coding violations (LCVs) encountered by the T1/E1
interface.
T1/E1 Port/Link IMA LInk Performance Statistics The T1/E1 Link Performance
Monitoring screen lists the following statistics:
IV-IMA—IMA violation; the number of errored, invalid, or missing ICP cells.
SES-IMA—Near end severely-errored seconds; the number of seconds with IMA
violation, LOS, AIS, OOF, LCD, LIF, LODS at the near end.
SES-IMA-FE—Far end severely-errored seconds; the number of seconds with IMA
violation, LOS, AIS, OOF, LCD, LIF, LODS at the far end.
UAS-IMA—Near end unavailable seconds; the number of unavailable seconds at
the near end.
UAS-IMA-FE—Far end unavailable seconds; the number of unavailable seconds at
the far end.
Tx-UUS-IMA—Near end transmit unusable seconds; the number of unusable
seconds at the near end interworking Tx link state machine.
Rx-UUS-IMA—Near end receive unusable seconds; the number of unusable
seconds at the near end interworking Rx link state machine.
Tx-UUS-IMA-FE—Far end transmit unusable seconds; the number of unusable
seconds at the far end interworking Tx link state machine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Rx-UUS-IMA-FE—Far end receive unusable seconds; the number of unusable
seconds at the far end interworking Rx link state machine.
Tx-FC—Number of near-end transmit failures.
Rx-FC—Number of near-end receive failures.
Tx-FC-FE—Number of far-end transmit failures.
Rx-FC-FE—Number of far-end receive failures.
T1/E1 Port/Link IMA Link ATM Statistics The T1/E1 Link ATM Statistics screen
lists the following statistics:
Tx Cells—The number of cells transmitted in a port/group since the counter was
cleared.
Rx Cells—The number of cells received in a port/group since the counter was
cleared.
Rx ICP Cell Error—The number of ICP cells received in a port/group since the
counter was cleared.
Tx Cell Rate—Current transmitted data cells rate.
Rx Cell Rate—Current received data cells rate.
Rx ICP Cell Error Rate—Current ICP received cell error rate.
Avg. Tx Cell Rate—Average received data cells rate calculated over the last 8
seconds.
Avg. Rx Cell Rate—Average transmitted data cells rate calculated over the last 8
seconds.
Avg. Rx ICP Cell Err or Rate—Average received errored ICP cells rate calculated
over the last 8 seconds.
T1/E1 Group Statistics
This section describes the T1/E1 group statistics.
T1/E1 Group Performance Statistics The T1/E1 Group Performance screen lists
the following statistics:
Running Seconds—The amount of time (in seconds) since the IMA group has
been in operation (up or down).
Unavailable Seconds—Count of unavailable seconds at the near end
interworking group state machine.
NE Number of Failures—Number of times a near end group failure has been
reported since powerup or reboot.
FE Number of Failures—Number of times a far end group failure has been
reported since powerup or reboot.
T1/E1 Group ATM Statistics The T1/E1 Group ATM Statistics screen lists the
following statistics:
Tx cells—The number of cells transmitted in a group since the counter was
cleared.
Rx cells—The number of cells received in a group since the counter was cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 189
Rx ICP cell errors—The number of cells received in a port/group since the counter
was cleared.
Tx cell rate—Current transmitted data cells rate.
Rx cell rate—Current received data cells rate.
Rx ICP cell error rate—Current ICP received cell error rate.
Avg. Tx cell rate—Average transmitted data cells rate calculated over the last 8
seconds.
Avg. Rx cell rate—Average received data cells rate calculated over the last 8
seconds.
Avg. ICP cell error rate—Average received errored ICP cells rate calculated over
the last 8 seconds.
Viewing OC3/STM-1 You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the OC3/STM-1
Card Statistics port.
Viewing OC3/STM-1 Performance Statistics
To view OC3/STM-1 performance statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Card Statistics menu, select [4] OC3/STM-1 UNI. The OC3/STM-1
Performance Management menu appears.
2 Select [1] OC3/STM-1 Performance Monitoring. The OC3/STM-1 Performance
Management menu appears as shown in Figure 147.
Figure 147 OC3/STM-1 Performance Management Menu
3 Select the option corresponding to the type of performance monitoring (PM) data
you want to view: section, line, far line, path, or far path.
4 Select the option corresponding to the type of data you want to display (current,
interval, or total). The OC3/STM-1 Performance Monitoring screen displays the
current, interval, or total data for the type of statistic you selected in step 2b.
The following subsections list the statistics displayed for each of these types of
performance monitoring.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
OC3/STM-1 Section Performance Statistics The OC3/STM-1 Section
Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics:
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1 section.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 section.
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the OC3/STM-1 section.
CVS—The number of coding violations (CVs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1
section.
LOS—The number of Loss of Signal (LOS) conditions encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 section.
LOF—The number of Loss of Frame (LOF) conditions encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 section.
OC3/STM-1 Line Performance Statistics The OC3/STM-1 Line Performance
Monitoring screen displays the following statistics:
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1 line.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 line.
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1
line.
CVS—The number of coding violations (CVs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1 line.
AIS—Indicates whether or not an Alarm Indicator Signal (AIS) condition has been
encountered by the OC3/STM-1 line.
RDI—Indicates whether or not a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) condition has
been encountered by the OC3/STM-1 interface. Also known as FERF (Far End
Receive Failure). This is the alarm that is generated when a far end AIS or LOP
defect is detected.
OC3/STM-1 Far Line Performance Statistics The OC3/STM-1 Far Line
Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics:
ES—The number of far end errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1
interface.
SES—The number of far end severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 interface.
UAS—The number of far end unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 interface.
CVS—The number of far end coding violations (CVs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 interface.
OC3/STM-1 Path Performance Statistics The OC3/STM-1 Path Performance
Monitoring screen displays the following statistics:
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path
interface.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 path interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 191
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1
path interface.
CVS—The number of coding violations (CVs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path
interface.
LOP—Indicates whether or not a Loss of Pointer (LOP) condition has been
encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path interface.
AIS—Indicates whether or not an Alarm Indicator Signal (AIS) condition has been
encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path interface.
RDI—Indicates whether or not a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) condition has
been encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path interface. Also known as FERF (Far End
Receive Failure). This is the alarm that is generated when a far end AIS or LOP
defect is detected.
UEQ—Indicates whether or not an Unequipped (UEQ) condition has been
encountered by the OC3/STM-1 path interface. If a path is not provisioned (i.e. it is
idle), the SONET equipment will signal this state.
PLM—Physical Layer Module.
OC3STM-1 Far Path Performance Statistics The OC3/STM-1 Far Path
Performance Monitoring screen displays the following statistics:
ES—The number of far end errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the OC3/STM-1
path interface.
SES—The number of far end severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 path interface.
UAS—The number of far end unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 path interface.
CVS—The number of far end coding violations (CVs) encountered by the
OC3/STM-1 path interface.
Viewing OC3/STM-1 ATM Statistics
To view OC3/STM-1 ATM statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Performance Management menu, select [4] OC3/STM-1 UNI. The
OC3/STM-1 Performance Management menu appears.
2 Select [2] ATM Statistics. ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter
reset. On the OC3/STM-1 ATM Statistics screen, you can reset the counter by
entering [c].
The OC3/STM-1 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information:
Cells Received—The number of ATM cells received on the OC3/STM-1 since the
last user reset of this counter.
Cells transmitted—The number of ATM cells transmitted on the OC3/STM-1
since the last user reset of this counter.
Cells with uncorrectable HCS errors—The number of idle/unassigned cells
encountered and dropped on the interface due to uncorrectable HCS errors.
Cells with correctable HCS errors—The number of header check sequence
(HCS) errored cells encountered on the ATM interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Viewing DS3 Card You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the DS3 UNI
Statistics module.
Viewing DS3 UNI Performance Statistics
To view DS3 UNI performance statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Card Statistics menu, select [9] DS3 UNI to open the DS3 UNI
Performance Management menu. This menu is similar to the OC3/STM-1
Performance Management menu, shown earlier in Figure 147.
2 Select [1] DS3 UNI Performance Monitoring to open the DS3 Performance
Monitoring menu. The DS3 Performance Monitoring menu provides the following
information:
PES—The number of P-bit errored seconds (PESs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
PSES—The number of P-bit severely errored seconds (PSESs) encountered by the
DS3 interface.
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the DS3 interface.
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
LCV—The number of line coding violations (LCVs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
PCV—The number of path coding violations (PCVs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
LES—The number of line errored seconds (LESs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
CCV—The number of C-bit coding violations (CCVs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
CES—The number of C-bit errored seconds (CESs) encountered by the DS3
interface.
CSES—The number of C-bit severely errored seconds (CSESs) encountered by the
DS3 interface.
Viewing DS3 UNI ATM Statistics
To view DS3 ATM statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Card Statistics menu, select [9] DS3 UNI to open the DS3 Performance
Management menu.
2 From the DS3 Performance Management menu, select [2] ATM Statistics. ATM cell
statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset. On the DS3 ATM Statistics
screen, you can reset the counter by entering [c].
The DS3 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information:
Cells Received—The number of ATM cells received on the DS3 since the last user
reset of this counter.
Cells transmitted—The number of ATM cells transmitted on the DS3 since the
last user reset of this counter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 193
Cells dropped—The number of idle/unassigned cells encountered and dropped
on the interface.
Cells with HCS errors—The number of header check sequence (HCS) errored
cells encountered on the ATM interface.
Viewing E3 Card You can view both performance statistics and ATM statistics for the E3 UNI
Statistics module.
Viewing E3 UNI Performance Statistics
To view E3 UNI performance statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Card Statistics menu, select [9] E3 UNI to open the E3 UNI Performance
Management menu. This menu is similar to the OC3/STM-1 Performance
Management menu, shown earlier in Figure 147.
2 Select [1] E3 UNI Performance Monitoring to open the E3 Performance
Management menu. The E3 Performance Management menu provides the
following information:
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the E3 interface.
LCV—The number of line coding violations (LCVs) encountered by the E3
interface.
LES—The number of line errored seconds (LESs) encountered by the E3 interface.
Viewing E3 UNI ATM Statistics
To view E3 ATM statistics, follow these steps:
1 From the Card Statistics menu, select [9] E3 UNI to open the E3 Performance
Management menu.
2 From the E3 Performance Management menu, select [2] ATM Statistics. ATM cell
statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset. On the E3 ATM Statistics
screen, you can reset the counter by entering [c].
The E3 ATM Statistics menu provides the following information:
Cells Received—The number of ATM cells received on the E3 since the last user
reset of this counter.
Cells transmitted—The number of ATM cells transmitted on the E3 since the last
user reset of this counter.
Cells dropped—The number of idle/unassigned cells encountered and dropped
on the interface.
Cells with HCS errors—The number of header check sequence (HCS) errored
cells encountered on the ATM interface.
Viewing SIM Card You can view HDLC, Frame Relay, and ATM VC statistics for the serial port. To view
Statistics serial port statistics, follow these steps:
Statistics menu appears.
2 Select [1] Port 1.
3 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
SIM HDLC Statistics
SIM HDLC statistics include:
Received Frames—The total number of received frames with good FCS at this
port.
Transmitted Frames—The total number of successfully-transmitted frames at
this port.
Discarded Invalid Frames—The total number of frames discarded at this port
because they were invalid. Invalid frames are frames that are received with good
FCS but that cannot be processed due to wrong content.
Discarded Congested Frames—The total number of frames discarded at this
port because they were congested. Congested frames are frames that were not
transmitted due to link congestion.
Received bytes—The total number of bytes received at this port.
Transmitted bytes—The total number of bytes transmitted at this port.
FCS Errors—The total number of received frames with bad FCS at this port.
SIM Frame Relay Statistics
SIM Frame Relay statistics include:
VC#—The system-assigned virtual circuit number.
(Side A) card s/p—The slot and port number for side A of the circuit.
(Side A) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side A) tx—The transmit VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side B) card s/p—The slot and port number for side B of the circuit.
(Side B) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side B.
(Side B) tx —The transmit VCI/VPI for side B.
(Side B) Desc—The user-entered description of the circuit.
SIM ATM VC Statistics
SIM ATM VC statistics include:
VC#—The system-assigned virtual circuit number.
(Side A) card s/p—The slot and port number for side A of the circuit.
(Side A) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side A) tx—The transmit VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side B) card s/p—The slot and port number for side B of the circuit.
(Side B) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side B.
(Side B) tx —The transmit VCI/VPI for side B.
Desc—The user-entered description of the circuit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 195
Viewing Ethernet Card Ethernet statistics are collected according to the Ethernet bridge MIB on the
Statistics Ethernet port and on every ATM connection tied to this port. You can view bridge,
filtering, and Ethernet statistics, and you can also view ATM VC statistics for the
Ethernet port.
To view Ethernet port statistics, follow these steps:
2 Select [1] Port 1.
3 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistic you want to view:
[1] Ethernet Statistics or [2] ATM Statistics.
Ethernet Statistics
The Ethernet Statistics screen displays the following statistics:
Bridge Statistics
Port state—The state of the Ethernet port: connected or not connected.
Total frames received—The total number of frames received at this port.
Broadcast Frames—The number of broadcast frames received on the port.
Discarded Frames—The number of valid frames received that were discarded
(filtered) by the forwarding process.
Flooded Frames—The total number of incoming frames that were flooded on
this port.
Forwarded Frames—The number of incoming frames at this port that were
forwarded.
Total frames transmitted—The total number of frames transmitted at this port.
Filtering Statistics
MAC MTU Exceeded—The number of frames discarded because of a size greater
than the maximum MTU size for the port.
No ATM VCs present—The number of frames discarded because there was no
ATM VC associated with the physical port.
Bridge discards—The number of frames discarded due to the bridging operation.
Output port disabled—The number of frames discarded because the output
port was disabled.
Source address filtered—The number of frames discarded due to source address
filtering.
Destination address filtered—The number of frames discarded due to
destination address filtering.
SAP Filtered—The number of frames discarded due to the protocol filtering
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Ethernet Statistics
Transmitted Frames—The total number of frames transmitted at this port.
Transmitted bytes—The total number of bytes transmitted at this port.
Received Frames—The total number of frames received at this port.
Received bytes—The total number of bytes received at this port.
CRC errored frames—The number of frames with CRC errors detected at this
port.
Late collisions—The number of times that a collision has been detected on this
port later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.
Deferred transmits—The number of frames for which the first transmission
attempt at this port was delayed because the port was busy. This count does not
include frames involved in collisions.
Single collisions—The number of successfully-transmitted frames at this port for
which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
Multiple collisions—The number of successfully-transmitted frames at this port
for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
Excessive collisions—The number of frames for which transmission at this port
failed due to excessive collisions.
Carrier sense errors—The number of times that the carrier sense condition was
lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame at this port.
Internal transmit errors—The number of frames for which reception at this port
failed due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
Oversized frames—The number of frames received at this port that exceeded
the maximum permitted frame size.
The Ethernet ATM Statistics screen displays the following ATM VC statistics for the
Ethernet port:
VC#—The system-assigned virtual circuit number.
(Side A) card s/p—The slot and port number for side A of the circuit.
(Side A) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side A) tx—The transmit VCI/VPI for side A.
(Side B) card s/p—The slot and port number for side B of the circuit.
(Side B) rx—The receive VCI/VPI for side B.(Side B) tx —The transmit VCI/VPI for
side B.
(Side B) Desc—The user-entered description of the circuit.
Spanning Tree Statistics
The Spanning Tree Statistics screen displays the following statistics:
Bridge Identifier—The bridge address of the Ethernet port.
Root Bridge—The bridge root address of the Ethernet port.
Designated Bridge ID—The designated Spanning Tree bridge ID of this port.
Hello Time—The time interval between issuing STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)
configuration messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 197
Forward Delay—The amount of time in the “learning” and “listening” states;
half the amount of time that must elapse between the time when it is decided
that a port should become part of the Spanning Tree and the time when data
traffic is allowed to be forwarded to and from that port.
Maximum Age—The time at which a configuration message is discarded.
Port Identifier—The bridge root port of the Ethernet port.
Root Path Cost—The bridge root path cost of the Ethernet port.
Designated Port ID—The designated Spanning Tree bridge port ID of this port.
Topology Changed—The topology change state of Spanning Tree for this port.
Topology Changed Count—The number of topology changes of Spanning Tree
for this port.
Total Forward Transitions—The total number of times this port has transitioned
from the learning state to the forwarding state.
Total BridgeUp Time—The total amount of time that this port has been up as
part of the Spanning Tree bridge.
Viewing CBR Module You can view both performance monitoring and ATM statistics for the CBR
Card Statistics module. To view CBR statistics, follow these steps:
2 Select the port for which you want to view statistics.
3 Enter the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view:
[1] Performance Monitoring or [2] ATM Statistics.
CBR Performance Monitoring Statistics
The CBR Performance Monitoring screens display the following statistics:
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the CBR T1-DSX/E1
interface.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the CBR T1-DSX/E1 interface.
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
CSS—The number of controlled slip seconds (CSSs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
PCV—The number of path coding violations (PCVs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
LES—The number of line errored seconds (LESs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
BES—The number of bursty errored seconds (BESs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
DM—The number of degraded minutes (DMs) encountered by the CBR T1-DSX/E1
interface.
LCV—The number of line coding violations (LCVs) encountered by the CBR
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
CBR ATM Statistics
ATM cell statistics are cell counts since the last counter reset. On the ATM Statistics
window, you can reset the counter by entering c. ATM statistics are displayed as a
list rather than a table. The CBR T1-DSX and CBR E1 ATM Statistics screens display
the following statistics:
CBR virtual circuits must be present in the database in order to view these
statistics.
Total Cells Received—Total number of cells received over the virtual circuit.
Total Cells Transmitted—Total number of cells transmitted over the virtual
circuit.
Total Cell Pointer Errors—Number of cells dropped due to structure pointer
mismatches.
Total Cells Lost—The difference between the number of cells transmitted and the
number of cells received.
Total Number of Buffer Underflows—Number of buffer underflows over the
virtual circuit.
Total Number of Buffer Overflows—Number of buffer overflows over the
virtual circuit.
Total out of Sequence Errors—Number of cells received with out-of-sequence
number mismatch.
Total CRC Errors—Number of cells received with uncorrectable sequence number
CRC error.
Total OAM Cells Received—Number of OAM (Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance) cells received over the virtual circuit. These cells carry OAM
information used for network management.
Total OAM Cells Transmitted—Number of Operations Administration and
Maintenance (OAM) cells transmitted over the virtual circuit.
Current Cell Status—Cell loss period count (for CBR use only).
Data Bytes To (structured data ports only)—The data bytes to the cell bus. Use
this value to set the DBA Bits Mask CBR port parameter. In most cases, the default
DBA Bits Mask (127) is appropriate. If you are experiencing problems with a CCS
circuit, however, you can set the DBA Bits Mask to monitor different bits. Check
the Data Bytes To value, and set the DBA Bits Mask to that value.
When you check the data bytes, you must first make sure that the circuit is in an
idle state (phone onhook). If you cannot access the equipment to see whether or
not the circuit is in idle, then check the data bytes for at least 30 seconds (about
seven updates). If the Data Bytes To value remains the same for 30 seconds or
more, it is safe to assume that the circuit is in an idle state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Performance and ATM Statistics 199
Viewing Voice You can view performance monitoring, virtual circuit, and port activity statistics for
Compression Module the Voice Compression module. To view VCM statistics, follow these steps:
Statistics
corresponding to the slot in which the VCM for which you want to view statistics
Figure 148 VCM Card Statistics Menu
2 Select the option corresponding to the type of statistics you want to view:
[1] Performance Monitoring, [2] Virtual Circuit Statistics, or [3] Port Activity
Statistics.
If you select [2] VC Statistics, an additional screen appears from which you must
select the virtual circuit for which you want to view statistics.
Voice Compression Module Performance Monitoring Statistics
The VCM Performance Monitoring screens display the following statistics:
ES—The number of errored seconds (ESs) encountered by the VCM T1-DSX/E1
interface.
SES—The number of severely-errored seconds (SESs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
SEFS—The number of severely errored framing seconds (SEFSs) encountered by
the VCM T1-DSX/E1 interface.
UAS—The number of unavailable seconds (UASs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
CSS—The number of controlled slip seconds (CSSs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
PCV—The number of path coding violations (PCVs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
LES—The number of line errored seconds (LESs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
BES—The number of bursty errored seconds (BESs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
DM—The number of degraded minutes (DMs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
LCV—The number of line coding violations (LCVs) encountered by the VCM
T1-DSX/E1 interface.
Voice Compression Module VC Statistics
Voice compression module VC statistics are frame and byte counts since the last
counter reset. On the VCM VC Statistics window, you can reset the counter by
entering c. VC statistics are displayed as a list rather than a table. The VCM
T1-DSX and VCM E1 VC Statistics screens display the following statistics:
Received Frames—Total number of frames received over the virtual circuit.
Transmitted Frames—Total number of frames transmitted over the virtual circuit.
AAL5 Errors—The total number of invalid frames received over the virtual circuit.
Invalid frames are frames that are received with good FCS but that cannot be
processed due to wrong content.
Discarded Congested Frames—The total number of frames received over the
virtual circuit that were discarded due to congestion. Congested frames are frames
that were not transmitted due to link congestion.
Voice Compression Module Port Activity Statistics
The VCM Port Activity Statistics screen displays the following statistics for each
channel.
ch—Channel number.
tx packets—Number of transmitted packets.
rx packets—Number of received packets.
tx bytes—Number of transmitted bytes.
rx bytes—Number of received bytes.
Viewing Virtual Circuit
Statistics
The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides you with circuit parameters and cell counts
broken down in various ways:
n
n
n
n
by circuit
by port/group
by shaper
by buffer (queue)
These statistics enable you to look at the cell loss at various points in the data flow
and adjust parameters—such as shaper values—accordingly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics 201
Viewing Virtual Circuit To display virtual circuit statistics by circuit, follow these steps:
Statistics by Circuit
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [2] Manage Circuits to display
the Virtual Circuit menu.
2 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [5] Show Virtual Circuit Statistics to display a
Figure 149 Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary Screen
Each pair of rows on the Virtual Circuit Statistics Summary screen provides the
following information about one of the existing virtual circuits:
Row 1 (left to right)
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
virtual circuit number
side A card type
side A slot and port numbers (IP address for the MCPU card)
side A receive VCI/VPI
side A transmit VCI/VPI
side B card type
side B slot and port numbers (IP address for the MCPU card)
side B receive VCI/VPI
side B transmit VCI/VPI
virtual circuit description
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Row 2 (left to right)
n
n
n
n
cells received on side A
cells dropped on side A
cells received on side B
cells dropped on side B
To view additional information about a particular circuit, enter the desired virtual
circuit number. In addition to the information displayed on the summary screen,
the Virtual Circuit Statistics Detail screen displays the number of cells sent on each
side of the selected circuit.
Viewing Virtual Circuit To display statistics for all virtual statistics by port/group, follow these steps:
Statistics by Port/Group
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [2] Manage Circuits to display
the Virtual Circuit menu.
2 From the Virtual Circuit menu, select [6] Show Virtual Statistics by Port/Group to
view a summary of statistics for all circuits on each port/group. The Port/Group
Virtual Statistics summary screen displays the following information for each
port/group:
Port/Group—Card type and port/group number.
rcvd from—Number of cells received
dropped—Number of received cells dropped
rcvd for—Number of cells sent
dropped—Number of sent cells dropped
To view the number of cells received, dropped, and sent from and to a particular
port/group, enter the desired port/group number.
Viewing Virtual Circuit To display virtual circuit statistics by shaper, follow these steps:
Statistics by Shaper
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu.
2 Select [2] CTX to display the CTX menu.
3 From the CTX menu, select [4] VC Statistics by Shaper to display counts of cells
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Virtual Circuit Statistics 203
Figure 150 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Summary Screen
4 To view statistics for a single shaper, enter the desired shaper number. As shown in
Figure 151, the Virtual Statistics by Shaper detail screen lists the number of cells
received, dropped, and sent on the selected shaper.
Figure 151 Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail Screen
5 To view virtual circuit statistics by circuit for the selected shaper, enter vfrom the
Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail screen. The screen that appears displays
the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics Summary screen shown earlier
in Figure 149—except that it lists information only for circuits on the selected
shaper rather than for all circuits.
You can also view the number of cells received, dropped, and sent on each side of
a particular circuit on the selected shaper by entering the desired virtual circuit
number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
CHAPTER 5: PATHBUILDER S330 DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
6 To view virtual circuit statistics by port/group for the selected shaper, enter pfrom
the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail screen. The screen that appears
displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics by Port/Group
Summary screen—except that it lists information by port/group only for circuits on
the selected shaper rather than for all circuits.
You can also view the number of cells received, dropped, and sent from and to a
particular port/group on the selected shaper by entering the desired port/group
number.
Viewing Virtual Circuit To display virtual circuit statistics by buffer, follow these steps:
Statistics by Buffer
(Queue)
1 From the Configuration Management menu, select [2] Manage Card to display the
List Card menu.
2 Select [2] CTX to display the CTX menu.
3 From the CTX menu, select [5] Show VC Statistics by Buffer to display counts of
cells sent and cells dropped for each buffer. The Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer
summary screen is similar to the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper summary
4 To view statistics for a single buffer, enter the desired buffer number. The Virtual
Statistics by Buffer detail screen lists the number of cells received, dropped, and
sent on the selected buffer. It is similar to the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper
detail screen shown earlier in Figure 151.
5 To view virtual circuit statistics by circuit for the selected buffer, enter v from the
Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Detail screen. The screen that appears displays
the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics Summary screen shown earlier
in Figure 149—except that it lists information only for circuits on the selected
buffer rather than for all circuits.
You can also view the number of cells received, dropped, and sent on each side of
a particular circuit on the selected buffer by entering the desired virtual circuit
number.
6 To view virtual circuit statistics by port/group for the selected buffer, enter p from
the Virtual Circuit Statistics by Buffer Detail screen. The screen that appears
displays the same information as the Show Virtual Statistics by Port/Group
Summary screen—except that it lists information by port/group only for circuits on
the selected buffer rather than for all circuits.
You can also view the number of cells received, dropped, and sent from and to a
particular port/group on the selected buffer by entering the desired port/group
number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
A
3Com provides easy access to technical support information through a variety of
services. This appendix describes these services.
Information contained in this appendix is correct at time of publication. For the
very latest, 3Com recommends that you access the 3Com Corporation
World Wide Web site.
Online Technical
Services
3Com offers worldwide product support 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, through
the following online systems:
n
n
n
n
World Wide Web site
3Com FTP site
3Com Bulletin Board Service (3Com BBS)
SM
3ComFacts automated fax service
World Wide Web Site Access the latest networking information on the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web
site by entering the URL into your Internet browser:
http://www.3com.com/
This service provides access to online support information such as technical
documentation and software library, as well as support options ranging from
technical education to maintenance and professional services.
3Com FTP Site Download drivers, patches, and software, across the Internet from the 3Com public
FTP site. This service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
To connect to the 3Com FTP site, enter the following information into your FTP
client:
n
n
n
Hostname: ftp.3com.com (or 192.156.136.12)
Username: anonymous
Password: <your Internet e-mail address>
A user name and password are not needed with Web browser software such as
Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
APPENDIX A: TECHNICAL SUPPORT
3Com Bulletin Board The 3Com BBS contains patches, software, and drivers for 3Com products. This
Service service is available through analog modem or digital modem (ISDN) 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
Access by Analog Modem
To reach the service by modem, set your modem to 8 data bits, no parity, and
1 stop bit. Call the telephone number nearest you:
Country
Australia
Brazil
Data Rate
Telephone Number
Country
Japan
Data Rate
Telephone Number
Up to 14,400 bps 61 2 9955 2073
Up to 14,400 bps 55 11 5181 9666
Up to 14,400 bps 33 1 6986 6954
Up to 28,800 bps 4989 62732 188
Up to 14,400 bps 852 2537 5601
Up to 14,400 bps 39 2 27300680
Up to 14,400 bps 81 3 3345 7266
Up to 28,800 bps 52 5 520 7835
Up to 14,400 bps 86 10 684 92351
Up to 14,400 bps 886 2 377 5840
Up to 28,800 bps 44 1442 438278
Up to 28,800 bps 1 408 980 8204
Mexico
France
P.R. of China
Taiwan, R.O.C.
U.K.
Germany
Hong Kong
Italy
U.S.A.
Access by Digital Modem
ISDN users can dial in to the 3Com BBS using a digital modem for fast access up to
56 Kbps. To access the 3Com BBS using ISDN, use the following number:
1 408 654 2703
3ComFacts Automated The 3ComFacts automated fax service provides technical articles, diagrams, and
Fax Service troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Call 3ComFacts using your Touch-Tone telephone:
1 408 727 7021
Support from Your
Network Supplier
If additional assistance is required, contact your network supplier. Many suppliers
are authorized 3Com service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of
services, including network planning, installation, hardware maintenance,
application training, and support services.
When you contact your network supplier for assistance, have the following
information ready:
n
n
n
n
Product model name, part number, and serial number
A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels
Diagnostic error messages
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable
If you are unable to contact your network supplier, see the following section on
how to contact 3Com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Support from 3Com 207
Support from 3Com
If you are unable to obtain assistance from the 3Com online technical resources or
from your network supplier, 3Com offers technical telephone support services. To
find out more about your support options, please call the 3Com technical
telephone support phone number at the location nearest you.
When you contact 3Com for assistance, have the following information ready:
n
n
n
n
Product model name, part number, and serial number
A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels
Diagnostic error messages
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable
Below is a list of worldwide technical telephone support numbers:
Country
Telephone Number
Country
Telephone Number
Asia Pacific Rim
Australia
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
New Zealand
Pakistan
Philippines
1 800 678 515
800 933 486
P.R. of China
10800 61 00137 or
021 6350 1590
800 6161 463
61 2 9937 5085
001 800 61 009
0031 61 6439
1800 801 777
0800 446 398
61 2 9937 5085
1235 61 266 2602
Singapore
S. Korea
From anywhere in S. Korea:
From Seoul:
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Thailand
82 2 3455 6455
00798 611 2230
0080 611 261
001 800 611 2000
Europe
From anywhere in Europe, call: +31 (0)30 6029900 phone
+31 (0)30 6029999 fax
From the following European countries, you may use the toll-free numbers:
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
06 607468
0800 71429
800 17309
0800 113153
0800 917959
0130 821502
00800 12813
1 800 553117
177 3103794
1678 79489
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K.
0800 0227788
800 11376
0800 3111206
05 05313416
0800 995014
900 983125
020 795482
0800 55 3072
0800 966197
Italy
Latin America
Argentina
Brazil
541 312 3266
55 11 523 2725, ext. 422
Colombia
Mexico
571 629 4847
01 800 849 2273
North America
1 800 NET 3Com
(1 800 638 3266)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
APPENDIX A: TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Returning Products
for Repair
Before you send a product directly to 3Com for repair, you must first obtain a
Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number. Products sent to 3Com without
RMA numbers will be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s expense.
To obtain an RMA number, call or fax:
Country
Telephone Number
65 543 6342
Fax Number
Asia, Pacific Rim
65 543 6348
Europe, South Africa, and
Middle East
011 44 1442 435860
011 44 1442 435718
From the following European countries, you may call the toll-free numbers; select option 2 and
then option 2:
Austria
06 607468
0800 71429
800 17309
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
0800 113153
0800 917959
0130 821502
00800 12813
1800553117
177 3103794
1678 79489
0800 0227788
800 11376
00800 3111206
05 05313416
0800 995014
900 983125
020 795482
0800 55 3072
0800 966197
Israel
Italy
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K.
Latin America
1 408 326 2927
1 408 764 6883
1 408 764 7120
U.S.A. and Canada
1 800 876 3266, option 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE
AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
B
This chapter describes the operation and data flow for each of the SuperStack® II
PathBuilder® S330 and S310 WAN access switch (PathBuilder S330/S310) modules
and supported applications. It contains the following sections:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Management CPU
The management CPU provides an intelligent user interface in addition to the
other built-in interfaces available on the PathBuilder S330/S310. It also monitors
and controls the activity on the shelf. These functions include:
n
n
n
n
n
n
Providing a user interface through a VT100 terminal or Ethernet (Telnet).
Programming configurations.
Generating and filtering alarms and transmitting them to the NMS.
Gathering performance-monitoring data.
Checking and assigning an appropriate clock source.
Communicating with other nodes via the management VC channel.
CTX Switch
The CTX switch interfaces to all ATM busses in the system. It handles address
translation and switching among seven ATM ports. Up to four ports come from
the T1/E1 UNIs. The other three ports come from the onboard OC3/STM-1, the
SAR, and expansion slots 7, 8, and/or 9 (the optional CBR module, Voice
Compression module, and DS3/E3 UNI module).
Address translation is done via two lookups. The first lookup is a VP lookup (all 8
bits included). If a VP circuit is set up, then a VP translation is done; otherwise, a
second lookup consisting of 2 VPI bits and 8 VCI bits, is done. For VC connections,
any four VPs in the range 0-255 are allowed. Once the VC is found, the CTX
performs the address translation.
If a cell carries data, then the switch tries to place it in the proper output FIFO
(First-In, First Out) order. If the queue is congested and early packet discard is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
enabled, an early packet discard operation is performed to check if the cell needs
to be discarded. Counters for cells received and cells dropped are also updated,
depending on the operation.
CTX Output Queues and The CTX is an output buffered switch, with a bus capacity of 400Mbits total. It can
Memory Partition store 64K cells. The CTX terminates three Utopia buses, each capable of
terminating an OC3/STM-1 payload.
n
The first bus carries the OC3/STM-1 interface on the motherboard.
n
The second bus is shared between the SAR and expansion slot 7; both are
treated as separate ports in the switch.
n
The third bus is used by the four T1/E1 UNI ports; this bus can handle up to
four separate ports in the switch.
The output buffer is statically divided on power up into 256 cell blocks. Any
number of blocks can be allocated to any queue. The software sets up a
reasonable default configuration, as listed on the CTX Buffers menu, shown in
To modify the CTX Buffers, follow these steps:
1 Open the CTX Buffers menu.
a From the Configuration Management menu, select [1] Manage Card.
b From the List Card menu, select [2] CTX.
c From the CTX menu, select [2] Manage Buffers.
2 Modify the CTX buffer configuration. Modify the default.
Figure 152 CTX Buffers Menu Displaying Default Memory Allocation
If you are not using a certain port and need to reallocate the buffers or do not like
the default configuration, you can define a new configuration. See “Configuring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CTX Switch 211
The default memory configuration uses all available memory. In order to reallocate
memory to a given queue, you must first deallocate it from one of the other
queues.
Since the CTX is output-buffered, and if the WAN trunk has the lowest speed (for
nxT1/E1), the WAN trunk should take up most of the buffer.
CBR traffic (voice and video) requires the least latency during transmission, while
VBR traffic (email and FTP) is more tolerable to delays but more sensitive to errors.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 platform handles these traffic patterns with multiple
levels of priorities. Each switch port, except the first T1/E1 UNI port, has two
queues: one for high and one for low. The first T1/E1 UNI port or IMA group has
four queues: one for high (0), one for medium (1), and two for low (2,3) with
multiple traffic shapers.
To get a practical feel for the queue size configuration, consider an example in
which the PathBuilder S330 is configured on the trunk side with a single group of
4 x T1/E1. The other three groups on the trunk are not used. In this case, all the
cells coming from the high-speed OC3/STM-1 are going to end up in the T1/E1
buffers.
You could partition the memory on the trunk side as follows (with one block
equalling 256 cells and the minimum queue size being 3 blocks):
n
n
n
The T1/E1 buffer could be configured to 48K (192 blocks) cells large.
The high queue could be 768 cells or 3 blocks (normally small),
The medium queue could be up to 16 blocks large, depending on the number
of connections and the bursts tolerated.
The remaining 173 blocks could be divided evenly among the two low queues.
You could partition the remaining 16K cells (64 blocks) as follows:
n
n
n
n
n
n
3 blocks for expansion slot 7 high
3 blocks for expansion slot 7 low
3 blocks for OC3/STM-1 2 high
26 blocks for OC3/STM-1 low
3 blocks for SAR high
26 blocks for SAR low
This is just an example; normally the lower the speed, the more buffering is
needed. When the T1/E1 IMA is configured for more than one group, then the
first group gets four queues and the rest get two queues. In most cases, if the
groups have the same speed, then the cells reserved for the trunk can be divided
equally.
Setting up a Virtual To configure a circuit in the PathBuilder S330/S310, you must set up a virtual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
VPI and VCI Ranges
As explained earlier in this chapter, address translation is performed in the CTX.
For VP connections, the full 8 bits of the VPI is looked up, so up to 256 VP
connections are supported per port. For VC connections, only two LSB VPI bits and
8 LSB VCI bits are considered. So, for VC connections, VPs 0 through 3 and VCs 1
through 255 are the only ones supported.
Early and Partial Packet Early packet discard (EPD) and partial packet discard (PPD) functions are provided
Discard on the CTX for every connection. EPD and PPD are enabled per VC for those VCs
carrying AAL5 traffic.
For EPD, every output queue contains two thresholds that you can set: congestion
thresholds. Partial packet discard works when the queue is actually full and a cell is
dropped for a particular connection. When this happens, the rest of the cells for
that connection are discarded until the end of packet is reached.
T1/E1 UNI Interface
The four T1/E1 UNI interfaces allow you to connect legacy, voice, video, and data
traffic to your branch offices, using either single T1s/E1s or nxT1/nxE1 IMA
bundles. The IMA bundles connect up to four lines from a single office site.
The PathBuilder S310 has only a single T1/E1 interface.
On the T1/E1 receive side, the data flow is as follows:
n
A line interface unit recovers the digital data and performs the T1/E1 framing
on it with DSX and CSU capability. The integral CSU eliminates the need for an
external CSU.
n
n
The data flows through a framer to get the ATM cells.
The output of the framer interfaces to the IMA circuitry that stores the data
into memory and synchronizes the cells back. All four T1’s/E1s go into the IMA
buffers where they can be treated as one group or as four separate groups
(four individual T1’s/E1s).
n
After the cells are synchronized, the IMA circuitry tags them with a group
number and passes them to the CTX. At the CTX interface, the cells will look
like they are coming from different groups.
On the T1/E1 transmit side, the data flow is as follows:
n
Cells received from the CTX toward the T1/E1 groups are stored in the
corresponding buffers, as described under “CTX Output Queues and Memory
groups have two buffers each.
n
n
The cells are picked up from the queues in order of priority, under the shaper
control, and delivered to the IMA logic.
The IMA logic spreads the cells in a particular group across the physical lines
and adds the IMA overhead functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OC3/STM-1 Port 213
n
n
The cells are passed to a line HEC framer to synchronize to the line speed.
The T1/E1 chip adds the T1/E1 overhead and converts the digital data into a
bipolar format suitable for transmission.
An 8 KHz clock is extracted from the T1/E1 clock (on all T1’s/E1s) and is used for
system synchronization. The system uses this clock or other clocks to generate a
stable 8 KHz clock for all other modules and interfaces.
OC3/STM-1 Port
The OC3/STM-1 port supports either a multi-mode fiber interface—used mostly
for local workgroup switch connection—or a single-mode fiber interface—used
for intermediate range operation (up to 15 kilometers).
The PathBuilder S310 does not include an OC3/STM-1 port.
On the OC3/STM-1 receive side, the data flow is as follows:
n
A fiber interface module converts the light to electrical data.
n
The data is fed to a chip where the clock is recovered. The PHY chip also
provides all the line functions and cell framing.
n
n
The chip interfaces directly to the CTX, which performs address translation and
output buffering.
The data is placed in the corresponding output buffer.
On the OC3/STM-1 transmit side, the data flow is as follows:
n
Cells received from the CTX are passed directly to the transmitter. Four buffers
are supported for the OC3/STM-1.
n
The output of the chip feeds into the fiber interface module.
An 8 KHz clock is extracted from the OC3/STM-1 clock, and the system uses the
OC3/STM-1 clock or other line clocks to generate a stable 8 KHz clock to be used
for system synchronization.
DS3/E3 UNI Modules
The optional DS3 module is compatible with AT&T Publication 54014
specifications, uses the unchannelized format, and is compliant to M23 or the
C-bit parity ANSI-107a, 1991 specifications. It performs the following key
functions:
n
Provides line interface functions and terminates the FEAC and MDL for the
C-bit format
n
n
Performs ATM to physical layer mapping and adds PLCP according to UNI 3.0
Performs peak traffic shaping on the transmit (14 bulk shapers)
The optional E3 UNI module is typically used for terminating/accessing public or
private WAN services. However, depending on your local applications, you can also
use this module in the port slot for taking local traffic across the WAN.
The E3 UNI module performs the following key functions:
n
Performs ATM to physical layer mapping and adds PLCP according to UNI 3.0
Performs peak traffic shaping on the transmit (14 bulk shapers)
n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Serial Interface
The serial interface is designed to interconnect frame-based devices/networks and
cell-based ATM devices/networks. The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides a single
serial interface that can be configured as DTE or DCE and, with different cable
adapters, can support V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21 interface to routers.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 can perform cell-to-frame as well as frame-to-cell
conversion. On the serial interface receive side, frames received from the HDLC
serial interfaces are segmented to cells by the SAR and passed to the CTX chip
where they can be switched. On the serial interface transmit side, cells received
from the ATM interfaces are reassembled into frames and passed to the HDLC
serial interfaces.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 uses a RISC processor to perform the lookup and
interworking functions between frame and ATM services. It also performs the LMI
functions and collects alarms and statistics.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 provides for frame relay service and network
interworking (FRF 5 and 8), as well as ATM DXI and transparent HDLC operation.
You can use it for interworking between the ATM network and a variety of
different frame-based networks or devices such as Frame Relay and ATM DXI.
The interface can be clocked up to 6.2Mbps, and it supports the following modes
of operation:
Internal timing—DCE provides the clock for a router.
External timing—DTE receives a clock from a DCE device such as a DSU (digital
service unit).
The mode of operation is selected automatically (by autosensing), based on the
type of cable connected to the unit—DCE or DTE.
Serial Interface Frame The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports three modes of Frame-to-Cell transit services:
Protocol Modes
ATM DXI Mode 1A—Supported by certain routers.
HDLC/SDLC—Used mainly for transparent point-to-point operation.
Frame Relay Forum Specification 5 and 8; modes 1 and 2—Used to terminate
a frame relay router.
Each service is designed to support a different type of user application; however,
all the services share the same ATM backbone characteristics. The serial port
modules are mapped over ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Interface 215
When connecting the PathBuilder S330/S310 to an ATM network, verify that the
PVC mapping for in and out ports is defined for proper operation. (See
Figure 153 PathBuilder S330/S310 to ATM PVC
PathBuilder
S330/S310
PathBuilder
S330/S310
Frame
In
VP 0
Out
VC 50
VP 3
Out
VC 45
ATM
VP 0 VC 50
VP 3
VC 45
In
DLCI 50
It is also important to select the proper traffic contract from the ATM
switch/service provider. This card should utilize a VBR or CBR circuit set at the
speed of the connected port. (See Figure 154.)
Figure 154 PathBuilder S330/S310 Traffic Contract
PathBuilder S330/S310
CBR or VBR at
Frame In
1 Mbps
1 Mbps
1 Mbps
Sustained Cell
Rate
VBR service will work; however the synchronous path will be subjected to possible
discards and delay.
The following subsections describe the supported frame protocol modes in greater
detail.
ATM DXI Mode
ATM DXI mode is used to interconnect a DTE to a DCE. The DTE is typically a
legacy interworking device with limited ATM capability. Through ATM DXI, the
DCE allows the DTE to participate in an ATM network. Figure 155 illustrates a
PathBuilder S330/S310 in the ATM DXI network.
Figure 155 DXI Network Connection
DXI Frames
ATM Cells
DXI DCE
(PathBuilder
S330/S310)
DXI DTE
(Router)
ATM
Network
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
DXI protocol defines an open interface between the router and the Data Service
Unit. The Data Service Unit off-loads cell encapsulation services from the Brouter.
This will allow your current brouter to support ATM, simply by supporting V.35 and
High-level Data Link Control (HDLC).
The DXI protocol itself is based on HDLC and provides the mapping within the
HDLC frame to place the router data on an appropriate VC. (See Figure 156.)
Figure 156 DXI Protocol Enabling Transmission Between ATM Network and DXI Device
Synchronous
V.35
RS 449/422, X.21, RS-530
IP
Internet Router
DXI Link
DXI
Protocol
DXI
Transport
DXI
DXI Link
Transport
DS1
Router/DXI
AAL 5
ATM
ATM Cell
Path Layer
Line Layer
SONET
Section Layer
Photonic Layer
ATM/DSU/SONET
The ATM DXI Specification defines 3 different modes (1a, 1b, and 2) of
connections. This software release supports Mode 1a, which includes the
following features:
n
n
n
n
Up to 1023 virtual connections
Uses AAL5
Maximum DTE SDU size: 9232 bytes
Uses 16-bit FCS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Interface 217
Through ATM DXI, the DCE allows the DTE to participate in an ATM network. (See
Figure 157 DCE Allows DTE to Participate in ATM Network through ATM DXI
DTE SDU
DTE SDU
DXI Data Link
DXI Physical
AAL 5 CPCS
DXI Data Link
DXI Physical
AAL 5 SAR
ATM
UNI Physical
DXI
UNI
DCE
DTE
DXI Mode 1A is designed to allow legacy routers to utilize frame-based
transmission to transmit an ATM network to the DXI Mode 1A device (PathBuilder
S330/S310 serial interface), which then will perform SAR and AAL5 mapping to an
ATM PVC. It provides simple and efficient encapsulation of your service data unit
and supports AAL5 transit encapsulation. (See Figure 158.)
Figure 158 DXI Format Mode 1A
DTE
DTE Service Data Unit
SDU
Error Check
DTE to DSU
Flag FCS
Data
DXI Information Flag
DXI Frame
Octet
1
2
0-9232
2
1
DSU
DSU to ATM
Network
AAL 5 CPCS-PDU
01111110
Translation
Address Maps
to/from VPI/VCI
SAR-PDU
AAL 5
SAR
SAR-PDU
SAR-PDU
ATM Cell
DXI Protocol Mode 1A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
DXI protocol frame is an HDLC LLC1 frame similar to PPP protocol. Mode 1A
supports an AAL5 transit encapsulation. In terms of the Brouter, it is easier to
implement DXI protocol, since it only requires the Brouter to encapsulate the SDU.
DXI protocol supports up to 1023 connections and up to 9232 octets of payload.
(See Figure 158 on the previous page.)
Figure 159 DXI Applications
V.35/RS-449/RS-530/X.21/RS-366
PathBuilder S330/S310
PathBuilder S330/S310
PVC
ATM
DXI
Mode
1A
DXI
Mode
1A
ATM
Native
Host
When the PathBuilder S330/S310 receives a DXI Frame from the DXI DTE or an
ATM CPCS protocol data unit (PDU) from the ATM network, it translates from
frames into ATM CPCS PDUs or from ATM CPCS PDUs into frames by doing the
following:
n
n
n
Mapping the DFA in the DXI frame to the VPI/VCI in the ATM cell header
Mapping the CLP in the DXI frame to the CLP in the ATM cell header
Mapping the CN in the DXI Frame to the PTI in the ATM cell header
Mapping the DFA in the DXI Frame to the VPI/VCI
in the ATM cell header
In the DXI frame header, the DFA occupies 6 bits (bit 3 to bit 8) in the first octet
and 4 bits (bit 6 to bit 8) in the second octet. The ATM DXI Specification defines a
method for mapping between DFA and VPI/VCI. You can configure the PathBuilder
Mapping the CLP in the DXI frame to the CLP in the ATM cell header
When data is moved from DXI to ATM, the CLP bit in the DXI header is copied into
the CLP field in the ATM cell header without change. When data is moved in the
reverse direction, the CLP bit in the DXI header is always set 0, no matter what
value it is in the ATM cell header.
Mapping the CN in the DXI Frame to the PTI in the ATM cell header
When data is moved from DXI to ATM, the CN bit is always set to 0 by the DTE.
When data is moved in the reverse direction, the CN bit is set to 1 if PTI is 01x in
the last ATM cell of the AAL5 CPCS PDU; otherwise, it is set to 0.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Interface 219
HDLC/SDLC Mode
Transparent HDLC mode is used for point-to-point HDLC connections across the
ATM network. No service-based encapsulation other than AAL5 is needed. All
packets are terminated and SAR’d to a single VP/VC in the ATM network.
Transparent mode functionality is best implemented with a PRBS type of pattern
included in a sequence of frames. The TTC Firebird V.35 frame relay interface
provides that simple capability.
When using transparent HDLC mode, you set the following parameters:
n
Minimum number of flags between HDLC frames
CRC type
n
The PathBuilder S330/S310 will SAR AAL5 and map HDLC/SDLC frames onto an
ATM VCC. You could use the HDLC service for router to router and X.25 to X.25
links. You could use the SDLC service for IBM FID2 3270 SNA Peripheral or IBM
FID4 372X SNA Backbone.
You should disable NRZI on the FEP (i.e., IBM 3745). NRZI is commonly used when
the FEP is connected to DSUs over a non-digital line. The PathBuilder S330 does
not require NRZI to be enabled.
Figure 160 HDLC/SDLC Applications
PathBuilder
S330/S310
PathBuilder
S330/S310
HDLC
HDLC
X.25
X.25
X.25
X.25
PAD
3
7
2
5
3
FID 4
7 SDLC
FID 2
5 SDLC
FID 4
FID 2
S
N
A
2
3270
Host
Frame Relay Mode
Frame relay mode is used to terminate a frame relay router, across the ATM
network, for example. This protocol mode converts the frame relay DLCI to a
VP/VC ATM connection.
A PathBuilder S330/S310 provides two interworking features to interconnect a
Frame relay network with an ATM network:
n
Service Interworking
Network Interworking
n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
These interworking features are described in FRF.8 and FRF.5 respectively. The
major difference between these two features is that there is no FR-SSCS function
required for Service Interworking.
The following sections describe the details of these two interworking functions as
well as the features provided by the PathBuilder S330/S310.
Service Interworking Function
Figure 161 shows a PathBuilder S330/S310 providing Service Interworking
function between Frame Relay and ATM services. In this setup, a Frame Relay DTE
communicates with an ATM DTE, regardless of the fact that there is a different
type of DTE at each end of the connection.
Figure 161 Frame Relay/ATM Service Interworking Connection (FRF.8)
LAPD Frames
Frame
Relay DTE
ATM
Cells
ATM
Network
ATM
DTE
PathBuilder
S330/S310
Frame
Relay
Network
Frame
Relay DTE
Application
Q.922
DL Core
PHY
Application
Application
Null SSCS
AAL 5
SAR
Null SSCS
Q.922
DL Core
Q.922
DL Core
AAL 5
SAR
ATM
ATM
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
The interworking scheme shown in Figure 161 works as follows:
n
The application on the frame DTE passes its data through Q.922 core service
with the assumption that there is an end-to-end pipe to carry its data from its
end to the other DTE at the far end. The Q.922 core only sees a point-to-point
link to the next connection point; it has no knowledge about the type of
network behind the current link.
n
On the other end, the application residing in ATM DTE passes its data through
a NULL SSCS that sits on top of AAL5. What this ATM DTE sees is the ATM
network to which it is connected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Interface 221
n
The PathBuilder S330/S310 sitting in the middle performs all the required
translation and management functions between these two networks,
implementing the stacks as indicated in Figure 162 and performing the
following key functions:
n
Translating from Q.922 Frame to ATM AAL5 PDU and from ATM AAL5 PDU
to Q.922
n
n
n
Performing Frame PVC management
Managing traffic
Handling congestion
Network Interworking Function
Figure 162 shows a PathBuilder S330/S310 providing Network Interworking
function between Frame Relay and ATM services.
Figure 162 Frame Relay/ATM Network Interworking Connection (FRF.5)
Frame
Relay
Network
Frame
Relay
DTE
Frame
Relay
DTE
Frame
Relay
DTE
Frame
Relay
DTE
Frame
Relay
Network
ATM
Network
PathBuilder
S330/S310
PathBuilder
S330/S310
Application
Application
FR-SSCS
FR-SSCS
Q.922
DL Core
Q.922
DL Core
Q.922
DL Core
Q.922
DL Core
AAL 5
SAR
ATM
PHY
AAL 5
SAR
ATM
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
In the interworking scheme shown in Figure 162, a Frame Relay DTE
communicates with the other Frame Relay DTEs through an ATM network. Note
that FR-SSCS is used in this configuration.
This interworking scheme works as follows:
n
The Frame Relay DTE at either end works exactly the same way as the Frame
Relay DTE in the Service Interworking configuration: it passes its data through
Q.922 core service, assuming that there is an end-to-end pipe to carry its data
from its end to the other DTE at the far end.
n
On the other end, the application resides in a Frame DTE instead of an ATM
DTE.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
n
The PathBuilder S330/S310 performs all the required translation and
management functions between these two networks, implementing the stacks
n
Translating from Q.922 Frame to FR-SSCS/ATM AAL5 PDU and from
FR-SSCS/ATM AAL5 PDU to Q.922 Frame
n
n
n
Supporting 2-octet—not 3-octet or 4-octet—FR header (10-bit DLCI)
Allowing you to configure DLCI to VPI/VCI mapping
Providing one-to-one mapping: maps one FR-SSCS DLCI (default FR-SSCS
DLCI (1022) or 16-991) for one FR DLCI to one ATM VPI/VCI. (The FR-SSCS
DLCI(s) for the two end systems should be configured to be the same.)
n
n
Managing traffic
Handling congestion
Ethernet Interface
The PathBuilder S330/S310 Ethernet LAN modules provide multiple connections to
Ethernet segments over ATM WAN.
When the Ethernet interface receives data from the LAN, any packets appearing
on the 10BASE-T ports are checked for packet integrity and stored in the shared
memory area. The system then performs a bridge operation to determine if the
details.
n
If the packet is to go on the HDLC port, it is bridged directly after being
encapsulated properly for Frame Relay.
n
If the packet is to go on an ATM interface, the bridge determines the VCI
connection for the packet destination. The packet is then encapsulated
according to RFC 1483, and the descriptor is handed off to the SAR, together
with the associated ATM header descriptor. The SAR appends the AAL5
convergence sublayer to the packets and queues them according to the shaper
you specify for that connection. The packet is then segmented according to the
rate of the traffic descriptor, and the cells are sent to the CTX where ATM
switching and queueing is performed.
The SAR contains 15 traffic shapers, each of which can be programmed for
sustained cell rate of transmission (SCR), peak cell rate (PCR), and maximum burst
size (MBS).
The traffic shapers work as follows:
n
The packet is segmented using a dual leaky buffer algorithm, whereby the cells
are transmitted from each connection in the shaper at an average rate until the
bucket of token fills up (a token is given to the connection at an average rate if
it has no cells to transmit at that moment).
n
n
The shaper then turns the burst mode on and transmits at the peak rate for a
burst length. Note that the shaper serves every connection independently.
Cells received from the ATM WAN are switched via the CTX chip to the SAR
queues. You can enable shaping on the SAR queues to slow down the
incoming traffic on the SAR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Interface 223
n
n
The SAR will then assemble the cells belonging to the connections specified for
it.
When the cells are assembled, the CPU is given confirmation, and the bridge
function of the CPU examines the packet header, removes the encapsulation,
and—after learning the address and updating the bridge table—forwards the
packet to the proper destination.
n
The pointer of the packet to be forwarded is placed in the transmit queue of
the Ethernet port.
Bridge Operation The PathBuilder S330/S310 supports ATM permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) for
access to the ATM network. All the PVC’s configured for a port will form a virtual
Bridged Ethernet network to all other ports at the other end of the PVC.
The bridge operation is equivalent to a multiport bridge. It works as follows:
n
n
The bridge learns and builds forwarding tables for every PVC that is tied to the
Ethernet port.
When a packet is received on the port or any PVC tied to that port, the Source
MAC address is learned and kept in the forwarding table until the aging timer
expires. You can use the Bridge Configuration menu to add static forwarding
addresses that the bridge will not delete after the aging timer expires. See
n
When the packet arrives, the bridge looks up the destination MAC address to
determine the destination of the packet from the forwarding tables. If a
destination is found, the packet is forwarded to the correct destination. If a
destination is not found, the bridge broadcasts or floods the packet on all
PVC’s that are tied to the Ethernet port. Flooding is performed by forwarding
the packet on all destinations tied to the port.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 performs LLC-based multiplexing. Ethernet frames are
bridged as per RFC1483. Frames with NLPID of 0x00 are discarded as being invalid
frames. The PathBuilder S330/S310 does not support frames bigger than Ethernet
maximum frame size (1518) or IEEE802.3 frame size (1492) bytes (+ framing bytes)
coming off the ATM network.
The following subsections provide further detail about bridging operations.
Filtering
The first bridging operation determines if the packet is to be processed and
transmitted across the bridge or filtered out based on the list of protocols and
addresses input as part of the PathBuilder S330/S310 configuration. Filtering gives
you control over who communicates with whom in the network. The CPU reads
the header of each packet to determine the protocol, source address, and
destination address and then looks in the list to see if the packet should be passed
through the bridge. If it is to be filtered out, it is cleared from memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Spanning Tree Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1d) is a technique that detects loops in a network and
logically blocks the redundant paths, ensuring that only one route exists between
any two LANs. It eliminates the duplication of packets and provides fault tolerance
for resilient networks.
As the Spanning Tree is being constructed, bridges exchange information, which is
transmitted in packets called Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units (C-BPDUs).
During this process, the Spanning Tree Algorithm and Protocol (STAP) module
elects a root bridge in order to establish a stable spanning tree topology. The root
bridge determines the spanning tree topology and controls which bridges block
packets and which forward packets.
Once the topology is stable, all STAP bridges listen for special “Hello” C-BPDUs
transmitted from the root bridge at regular intervals (usually every two seconds). If
a STAP bridge timer expires before receiving a “Hello” C-BPDU, it assumes that the
root bridge, or a link between itself and the root bridge, has gone down. It then
initiates a reconfiguration of the Spanning Tree.
When a port goes down (for instance, when an ATM VC is deleted), the port card
notifies the STAP module of such a change. The STAP module then reinitiates the
process of electing a root bridge, and the Spanning Tree calculation process begins
all over again.
Spanning Tree Operation
The Spanning Tree operates as follows:
For more detailed information about how the Spanning Tree operates, see
IEEE802.1d.
n
An STAP module runs as a task on the management card. This task is
responsible for maintaining all data structures for Spanning Tree operation for
all ports and for sending/receiving Spanning Tree configuration packets.
n
Spanning Tree Bridge configuration Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) are received at
Ethernet port cards (on Ethernet and ATM ports) and are sent to the STAP
module on the management card.
n
n
n
The management card STAP module examines the packet, reads the MAC
address of the sender, and analyzes the costs reported by the sender.
When state of a port changes, the STAP module notifies the port card of the
change.
When a port card receives change information for a port, it updates the
operational state of the port so as to change the bridging operation on the
port. For instance, if a port in a forwarding state (normal operation mode of
receiving and forwarding packets) is discovered to be forming a loop, it can be
put in a blocking state. Once the port goes in the blocking state, the port card
will stop receiving frames on the port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Interface 225
Spanning Tree Instances
The Spanning Tree logic supports a maximum of 255 physical and virtual ports,
thereby allowing a maximum of 254 ATM VCs. (One Ethernet port is required be
set aside for other purposes.)
For the purpose of Spanning Tree operation, each set of one Ethernet port and its
associated ATM VCs is treated as one bridge entity. The STAP module runs a
separate instance for each bridge entity. Since the PathBuilder S600 shelf can be
filled with a maximum of three Ethernet cards, each with two Ethernet ports, a
maximum of six instances of STAP can be running on the management card.
Each STAP instance runs independently of the other STAP instances and processes
configuration packets as if they came from a different physical bridge device. This
approach helps segregate Ethernet ports completely for the purposes of bridging
and Spanning Tree and enables the PathBuilder S600 to operate as six separate
bridges.
VC-VC Bridging operation The Ethernet module supports full-mesh bridging
between its Ethernet port and all of its associated VCs. This bridging must be
bidirectional and should be conditional upon the operational status of the
Spanning Tree. If Spanning Tree operation is disabled, VC-VC bridging is not
necessary since the PathBuilder S600 is not expected to forward traffic coming
from the ATM network.
Addressing
The next bridging operation is to determine if a packet is addressed to another
unit on the LAN (in which case it can be rejected) or if it is addressed to a unit
across the bridge.
Each Ethernet packet includes a source address and a destination address in its
header. These are MAC addresses which are unique physical addresses assigned to
every Ethernet interface on every Ethernet LAN. Packet transmission from one unit
to another on the same LAN is easily accomplished. However, packet transmission
between units on different LANs requires a higher-level addressing scheme.
ATM networks are organized into virtual circuits or logical duplex paths between
two ATM unit ports as shown in Figure 163.
Each transmission direction in a virtual circuit is referred to as a virtual channel.
Virtual channels are then grouped into virtual paths between two ports. The
channels and paths are assigned numbers; VPIs (Virtual Path Indicators) and VCIs
(Virtual Channel Indicators). Each ATM cell (a fixed-length unit of data over ATM)
is assigned to a virtual circuit by including the circuit's VPI/VCI in the cell's header.
These are then used to steer the cell through an ATM unit and the ATM network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Figure 163 Virtual Circuit Scheme
Transmission
Path
VPI 1
Virtual
Circuit
VCI 1 (Transmit)
VCI 1 (Receive)
{
VPI 2
VPI 3
VCIs
{
VCIs
{
workstation 1 on LAN AA wants to send data to workstation 2 on LAN BB. It
transmits Ethernet packets which include its MAC address and that of workstation
2. PathBuilder S330 A groups the packets into cells and, since it does not know
where workstation 2 is, broadcasts the cells on all VPI/VCIs. PathBuilder S330 B
learns that workstation 1 transmits to its T1/E1 UNI port over VPI/VCI 1/33 and
VPI/VCI 2/35. This information is then stored in forwarding tables in
PathBuilder S330 B.
When workstation 2 responds, it includes its MAC address and that of
workstation 1 in the packets. PathBuilder S330 B looks in the appropriate
forwarding table and finds that it can reach workstation 1 on VPI/VCI 2/5. When
the first response cell on 2/35 is formatted back into packets at PathBuilder S330
A, then PathBuilder S330 B learns how to reach workstation 2 without
broadcasting.
Figure 164 Virtual Circuits in a Simple Network
Workstation 1
VPI/VCI 1/33
LAN
AA
LAN
BA
n x T1 or
n x E1
PathBuilder
S330/S310
B
PathBuilder
S330/S310
A
VPI/VCI
2/35
LAN
AB
LAN
BB
PathBuilder S330/S310
Workstation 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Interface 227
The aggregate of VPIs/VCIs assigned to the Ethernet connection of the PathBuilder
S330/S310 is referred to as a bridge. Since the PathBuilder S330/S310 reads and
stores MAC addresses and associated VPIs/VCIs as described above, the bridge is
called a learning bridge. Each learning bridge of the PathBuilder S330/S310 has a
separate forwarding table containing the MAC address to VPI/VCI associations.
When a learned entry is stored in a forwarding table, it is time tagged. An aging
timer in the PathBuilder S330/S310, which you set, purges entries from the
forwarding tables after they have been in the tables for the aged time. The bridges
must then relearn purged addresses. This controls the size of the forwarding
tables, particularly in large networks.
In the PathBuilder S330/S310, each bridge also has a static table associated with it.
You can enter MAC addresses and corresponding VPIs/VCIs into the static table
that will not be affected by the aging timer. These entries might be for LAN units
that are relatively permanent and are accessed through the ATM network
frequently, such as servers.
x T1 (or E1/n x E1) between the two PathBuilder S330s, so cells leaving PathBuilder
S330 A on VPI/VCI 1/33 arrive at PathBuilder S330 B on VPI/VCI 1/33. Also if
theT1/nxT1 (or E1/n x E1) trunk were switched through a standard telephone
switching system to interconnect many PathBuilder S330s, each PathBuilder S330
would have to have the same VPI/VCI designations assigned. The ATM switch
removes this restriction.
Figure 165 shows several PathBuilder S330/S310s in an ATM-switched network.
The switch maps one VPI/VCI into another based on the destination of the packets
in the cell. It learns the complete topology of the network to do so. You can
independently configure each PathBuilder S330/S310 connected to the switch.
Figure 165 Virtual Circuits in a Switched Network
PathBuilder S330/S310 A
VPI/VCI 1/3
PathBuilder S330/S310 B
VPI/VCI 2/6
ATM
Switch
VPI/VCI 3/23
PathBuilder S330/S310 C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Segmentation
Once it is determined that a packet should go across the bridge, the packet is
encapsulated per RFC 1483 and a pad and trailer conforming to AAL5 (ATM
Adaption Layer 5) is added at the end of the packet. See Figure 166. The trailer is
fixed at eight bytes and contains information such as the new length of the packet
and cyclic redundancy check bytes (CRC facilitates error checking at the receive
end). The pad is set to 0 to 47 bytes to make the full packet length including the
trailer divisible by 48 bytes. The packet with the RFC 1483 encapsulation is then
segmented into 48-byte (384-bit) cells by the SAR function.
Figure 166 AAL5 Pad and Trailer
Trailer
PAD
(0-47 Bytes)
Reserved
2 Bytes
Length
2 Bytes
CRC
4 Bytes
Ethernet Packet
The cells are assigned to a virtual circuit defined between the incoming and
outgoing ports based on the destination address of the original packet. A 5-byte
header containing the virtual circuit assignment, along with other information, is
added to each cell. The cells are queued in the output FIFO (First In First Out
memory) of the Ethernet based on the bandwidth and quality of service
requirements assigned to the virtual circuit at configuration. The FIFO provides
elastic storage between the Ethernet and the CTX.
Reassembly
When the CTX receives a cell from the T1/E1 UNI interface, it broadcasts it to the
Ethernet port. As cells are received by the reassembler, their headers are read to
determine if they belong to the port. If so, the header is stripped and the cell is
stored in memory, appended to the previous ones for that virtual circuit. The
system also looks for the AAL5 trailer that signifies the end of a packet. When it
finds a trailer, it performs the CRC calculation, checks the length of the cells since
the previous trailer to be sure no cells were missed, strips the trailer, appends the
cell to the others to reform the original packet, and sends the packet through the
Ethernet interface to the LAN.
Typical Ethernet and A typical Ethernet and voice application configuration involves multiple
Voice Application PathBuilder S330s connected through an ATM network that could consist of
Configurations simply an ATM switch or of an ATM network consisting of multiple switches.
Figure 167 shows the latter configuration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Interface 229
Figure 167 PathBuilder S330/S310 Application
CSU #2
PBX 2
Structured
Input
LAN
2
CSU #1
DS0 Drop and Insert
Via Structured DS1 CBR
Unstructured Input
PathBuilder S330/S310 #2
n x T1
PathBuilder S330/S310 #1
ATM
Switched
Network
Port P2
Port P1
LAN
1
PBX 3
n x T1
Port P3
n x T1
CSU #1 connected to CSU #4
via unstructured DS1 CBR
CSU #3
LAN
3
CSU #2 connected to CSU #4
via structured DS1 CBR
PathBuilder S330/S310 #3
CSU #4
Circuits Set Up on The PathBuilder S330/S310 #1
Circuits Set Up on the PathBuilder S330/S310 #2
PVC END1
END2
VPI/VCI
Conn To
LAN2
PVC END1
END2
VPI/VCI
Conn To
LAN1
#1
#2
#3
LAN1
LAN1
CSU1
T1/nxT1 or 0/150
E1/nxE1
#1
#2
#3
LAN2
LAN2
PBX2
T1/nxT1 or 0/100
E1/nxE1
T1/nxT1 or 0/200
E1/nxE1
LAN3
CSU4
T1/nxT1 or 0/200
E1/nxE1
LAN3
PBX3
T1/nxT1 or 0/250
E1/nxE1
T1/nxT1 or 0/250
E1/nxE1
Circuits Set Up By The Carrier (Cross Connects)
Circuits Set Up on the PathBuilder S330/S310 #3
PVC END1
VPI/VCI1
0/150
END2
P2
VPI/VCI2
0/100
PVC END1
END2
VPI/VCI
Conn To
LAN1
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
P1
P1
P2
P2
P1
#1
#2
#3
#4
LAN3
LAN3
PBX3
CSU4
T1/nxT1 or 0/100
E1/nxE1
0/200
0/200
0/450
0/250
P3
P3
P3
P3
0/100
0/150
0/200
0/250
T1/nxT1 or 0/150
E1/nxE1
LAN2
PBX2
CSU1
T1/nxT1 or 0/200
E1/nxE1
T1/nxT1 or 0/250
E1/nxE1
Forward and Reverse VCCs Match in This Example. VCCs are
Undirectional. Only Forward Vccs are Shown for Easier Viewing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Figure 168 shows three PathBuilder S330s connected through a carrier ATM
network or a private switch. The ATM switch or network should be configured
with Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) connecting one LAN or Ethernet port on
one PathBuilder S330 to another port on another PathBuilder S330.
Figure 168 ATM Bridging
Forward Table
MAC Address
ATM
VP0/200 02608C456123
VP0/250 02608C123456
PathBuilder
S330/S310 B
Ethernet Bridge VP0/200
Port
VP0/250
n x T1 or
n x E1
02608C456123
02608C123456
ATM
Network
PathBuilder
S330/S310 C
PathBuilder S330/S310 A
Note that the numbers given for these circuits by the carrier are local to one
PathBuilder S330 and have no global significance. For example, VCC number
0/100 is used on two different PathBuilder S330s to mean two different circuits.
The carrier will assign each PathBuilder S330 at each location any number of
circuits to connect each PathBuilder S330 Ethernet port to any other PathBuilder
S330 Ethernet port.
The connections in the carrier network are shown for illustration only. The figure
shows an example for an ATM switch configuration. Note that the VCC numbers
get translated by the ATM switch since they have local meaning only for every
switch port. For example, at the #1 location, the carrier would provide the
PathBuilder S330 four VCCs for the forward and reverse path to connect to LAN2
and LAN3 respectively.
VCCs are unidirectional and, therefore, two VCCs are designated on a port of a
PathBuilder S330/S310 to transmit to, and receive from, another location.
The PVCs are provisioned by the carrier for use on each PathBuilder S330/S310.
These PVCs are entered in circuit tables within each PathBuilder S330/S310. After
the circuits are built, the bridge can use this information to send ATM cells to
remote sites.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 will support a maximum of 1000 VCs. You first
configure each PathBuilder S330/S310 with the PVC information by using screens
which prompt you to input specific information about each Permanent Virtual
tied to a specific PathBuilder S330/S310 port (the Ethernet port). The PathBuilder
S330/S310 Ethernet port can have several PVCs associated with it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CBR Module 231
Each PVC represents the logical circuit being used to connect one PathBuilder
S330/S310 port to a remote PathBuilder S330/S310 port. Once you have entered
all PVCs, the bridge will learn the network addresses for the local and remote sites
and start bridging packets to the correct destination by segmenting the packets
into cells which are destined to a remote PathBuilder S330/S310 port. See
Figure 168. The ATM network will transport the cells according to the VPI/VCI
headers.
Figure 169 shows three PathBuilder S330s configured to provide LAN connectivity
between three different LAN segments. Each Ethernet port will run Bridging
(Learning) programs to determine if received LAN packets should be passed to the
WAN on a specific PVC. In the above example, multi-port bridging software will
determine if packets will be passed or dropped. When a packet comes in from
LAN 1 port and the Bridge code does not have the destination MAC address
associated with one of its logical ports (Ethernet, PVC #1, PVC #2),it will broadcast
the packet on all PVCs associated with this port.
Once packets are received from the WAN on specific PVC logical ports, their
source addresses will be learned and associated with the logical port. Once you
and your carrier have set up PVCs to all remote PathBuilder S330/S310 Ethernet
ports, the Bridging code will do the rest.
Figure 169 LAN Connectivity
PathBuilder
S330/S310 #2
LAN
2
DS3 UNI 2
Bridge
Table
Forward Known
DS3 UNI 1
Port P2
Port P3
ATM
Switched
Network
LAN
1
Broadcast
Unknown
Port P1
PathBuilder
S330/S310 #1
Circuits Set Up by the Carrier
PVC END1 VPI/VCI1 End2 VPI/VCI2
DS3 UNI 3
#1
#2
#3
P1
P1
P2
0/200
0/250
0/250
P2
P3
P3
0/100
0/100
0/200
LAN
3
PathBuilder
S330/S310 #3
CBR Module
The optional T1-DSX/E1 CBR module provides three T1-DSX or E1 ports (one on
the PathBuilder S310) and one serial port. This module services traffic generated
by your existing PBXs, channels, T1/E1 multiplexers, CSU/DSUs, and video
conferencing devices. This service maps the T1-DSX/E1 service through the AAL1
adaptation layer over a CBR virtual channel connection (VCC). The VCC is
established as a permanent virtual circuit (PVC) and mapped from the PathBuilder
S330/S310’s ATM port to another PathBuilder S330/S310 or an ATM Forum circuit
emulation compliant device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
The T1-DSX/E1 inputs can be either ESF, SF, or no-framing using B8ZS or AMI. In
accordance with the ATM Forum’s Circuit Emulation Service (CES) specifications,
the received frame can be broken up into its DSO and ABCD signaling
components using structured mode or tunneled through the ATM network using
unstructured mode. Structured mode allows DSO mid span drop and insert or
grooming.
n
In structured format, the data is framed on, then any single 64K channel or a
group of timeslots can be selected, grouped and SAR’d to a single ATM
connection. In the T1-DSX/E1 format, up to 24 channels, or a combination
thereof, can be selected. The timing in structured mode should be loop or
structured service and when to use it.
n
In unstructured format, the data is treated as bits in / bits out and is converted
into cells with a single VP/VC connection. You can select the timing—loop,
system, SRTS or adaptive—in unstructured mode. With SRTS timing, the
internal system clock on both ends must be traceable to a common source. See
when to use it.
On the T1-DSX/E1 receive side, the data flow is as follows:
n
n
n
n
A line interface unit recovers the digital data.
The data flows through a framer to extract the serial data stream.
The data is fed to the AAL1 SAR device.
The SAR converts the data into ATM cells and tags the cells with the internal
VP/VC number.
n
The cells are passed through a FIFO to the CTX module.
On the T1-DSX/E1 transmit side, the data flow is as follows:
n
n
Cells received from the CTX module are buffered in a 32-cell FIFO to decouple
the CTX cells from the SAR. The depth of the FIFO is determined by the CDVT
cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT) parameter that you set.
The cells are fed in the SAR, and the SAR terminates the AAL1 pointer
overhead and places the payload in memory. For unstructured data, the clock is
recovered using the adaptive or the SRTS technique—or it can be loop-timed. If
the SRTS technique is used, the system clocks on both ends must be
synchronized.
n
The clock and data are sent out to a framer chip where the frame is added and
the signal is converted into analog.
An 8 KHz clock is extracted from one of the T1-DSX/E1 clocks and fed to the
motherboard connector. This clock is used as one of the options to derive the
system clock. The module also accepts an 8 Khz clock from the motherboard to
provide the T1-DSX/E1 and serial timing.
For the serial interface, the data is clocked as a serial bit stream and transferred to
the SAR, where it is converted into a structured path AAL1 stream. On the receive
from the ATM side, the cells are passed from the CTX to the SAR and the original
data is recovered. A timing option allows end-to-end clock recovery. The data is
then sent serially over the connector. A sensing option in the cable allows
automatic detection of DCE and V.35/RS-449 options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CBR Module 233
Structured DS1 Implement the structured service if you require DS0 midspan drop-and-insert. (See
Figure 170 CBR Structured DS1 - Drop and Insert
A
B
C
ATM Network
DS0 = 5
DS0 = 5
DS0 DS1
DS0 = 5 VP0/VC35
Structured CBR traffic
PathBuilder S330/S310
Channel
Bank
Public Switched
Telephone
Network
A
B
Channel bank converts analog to T1; putting channel on DS0 5.
PathBuilder S330/S310 puts DS0 5 on virtual circuit (VP0/VC35) and passes structured CBR traffic through
to the ATM network.
ATM network continues to carry CBR traffic on to another ATM network or drops the traffic (on DS0 5) to a
public switched telephone network.
C
Midspan drop and insert allows services such as public switched telephone service
to be inserted into the ATM link. Combining this service with Ethernet bridge
service will provide you with a complete integrated communications access
solution, as shown in Figure 171.
Figure 171 Integrated PathBuilder S330/S310 Application
Public Switched
Telephone
Network
PBX or Key
System
PBX or Key
System
Drop
DS0 = 6
DS0 = 1-6
Voice
ATM Network
LAN
Data
Ethernet
LAN
Ethernet
LAN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Drop-and-Insert DS0 channels can be allowed to transit the entire path, providing
DS0 to DS0 connectivity between end locations. Structured DS0s can also be
groomed to be combined through an ATM network, thereby allowing end-to-end
DS0 switching, as shown in Figure 172.
Figure 172 Structured DS0 Combining
DS1
10 DS0
10 DS0
Structured DS0
Grooming
DS1
ATM Network
Up to 24 Timeslots
PBX - Private Branch Exchange
VCC - Virtual Channel Connection
DS0 Signaling and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation
Structured voice DS0s allow for channel-associated signaling by providing a path
for DS0 ABCD bits. (See Figure 173.) Channel-associated signaling allows
telephone supervision to be signaled end-to-end. Note that structured DS1 CBR
occupies only the needed bandwidth for the DS0s selected.
Figure 173 Channel Associated Signaling
DS0
ABCD Bits
Channel Associated
Signaling (CAS)
Channel
Bank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CBR Module 235
These frames are then followed by the ABCD bits of each active DS0. Two DS0’s
ABCD bits are provided in each byte after the last DS0 group. Figure 174 shows an
example of three DS0s and their ABCD bits sent in a structured encapsulation.
Figure 174 Multiframe Structure for 3x64kbit/s DS1 with CAS
AAL1 Pointer
First Transported Octet of Multiframe
Second Transported Octet of Multiframe
First 125 µsec Frame of Multiframe for
DS1
Second 125 µsec Frame of Multiframe for
DS1
. . .
ABCD for
First
Transported
Timeslot
Last 125 µsec Frame of Multiframe for
DS1
Signaling
Substructure
ABCD for
Third
Transported
Timeslot
ABCD for Second
Transported Timeslot
Figure 175 AAL1 Structured DS1
FEC for SN/CSI
Lost Cell
Detection
Clock Recovery
SAR-SDU
47 Bytes
SAR
CSI
SN SNP
AAL Layer
ATM Layer
1 Bit 3 Bits 4 Bits
ATM Header
5 Bytes
AAL 1 Data
48 Bytes
AAL 1
VCC
CSI - Convergence Sublayer Indicator
FEC - Forward Error Correction
SNP - Sequence Number Protection
SN - Sequence Number
SAR - SDU - Segmentation and Reassembly Service Data Unit
VCC - Virtual Channel Connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Structured data DS0s allow for clear channel signaling (CCS). As opposed to CAS,
in which signaling is done on all channels, in clear channel signaling (CCS) one
channel is used to signal for the other channels.
The PathBuilder S330/S310 software can also monitor a full 8-bit pattern on a DS0
to determine circuit activity. This is the basis for the two supported types of
dynamic bandwidth allocation (DBA):
n
Structured voice DBA
Structured data DBA
n
Structured Voice DBA When a CBR port is configured as structured voice,
signaling bits of voice channels are carried along with their payload in AAL1 cells.
These signaling bits, which are received from T1/E1 framers, are stored in buffers
provided in the SAR processor. The CBR software periodically reads the stored
signaling bits and checks for an idle condition of voice channels with on-hook
detection enabled.
n
When an on-hook (idle) signal is detected, the CBR virtual circuit is deactivated,
and the bandwidth reserved for that channel is released for other uses (such as
VBR traffic).
n
When an off-hook signal is detected, the CBR virtual circuit is activated.
Use structured voice circuits with DBA for CAS (channel associated signaling)
applications.
Structured Data DBA When a CBR port is configured as structured data, only
DSO payload bytes are carried in AAL1 cells. These data cells are stored in buffers
provided in the SAR processor. The CBR software periodically reads the stored data
bits and checks for an idle code in the stored data bits of each DS0 channel. All
virtual circuits in the port use a user-selected DBA bit mask to mask off bits that
are not a portion of the idle code.
n
When an on-hook condition (idle code) is detected, the CBR virtual circuit is
deactivated, and the bandwidth reserved for that channel is released for other
uses.
n
When an off-hook condition (no idle code) is detected, the CBR virtual circuit is
activated.
Use structured data circuits with DBA for CCS (clear channel signaling)
applications.
A structured DS1 channel will not pass the original DS1 frame to the remote end.
For instance, ESF network management will terminate at the PathBuilder
S330/S310 on a structured DS1, so CSU-to-CSU Facility Data Link (FDL)
communication will not be possible. FDL communication is possible with
unstructured DS1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CBR Module 237
Unstructured DS1 Implement unstructured DS1 service when you want DS1 tunneling through an
ATM system. DS1 tunneling allows an entire DS1 frame, including framing bits, to
travel across an ATM network. See Figure 176.
Figure 176 DS1 Unstructured Tunneling
T1
Unstructured
Data
Data
Service
Service
Unit
ATM Network
Unit
Channel
Service
Unit
Channel
Service
Unit
DS1 Signal Tunneled Through a PVC
Use unstructured services when DS0 midspan access is not required and
end-to-end DS1 service is required; for example, to provide CSU or DSU
end-to-end connectivity. The encapsulation of unstructured DS1 occupies DS1
bandwidth on the VCC and uses AAL 1 SAR.
Structured versus Unstructured Summary
Table 32 When to use Structured Versus Unstructured Service
Structured
Unstructured
DSO midspan drop and insert
X
X
DSO access grooming
DS1 network management end to end
DS1 end to end (no DSO access)
DS1 CBR 1.536 Mbps of bandwidth
DS1 CBR 1.544 Mbps of bandwidth
Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Figure 177 depicts the effects of structured versus unstructured service on the DS1
framing.
Figure 177 Structured Versus Unstructured Effects on Transit DS1
PathBuilder S330/S310 Interface
DS1
AAL 1
DS0
DS0
DS0
DS0
A&B
ESF
FDL
DS1 Structured N x 64 Kbps
Bit
Bucket
PathBuilder S330/S310 Interface
DS1
AAL 1
DS1
ESF
FDL
DS1 = 1,544 Mbps
DS0 = 64 Kbps
DTE
Timing
DS1 Unstructured
DS - Digital Signal
ESF - Extended Superframe
Video Conferencing The serial port of the PathBuilder S330/S310 CBR module has two types of
interface: V.35 for video data and RS-366 for video dial. These interfaces are
broken out from a 50-pin connector on the S330/S310 via a Y cable.
The V.35/RS-366 serial CBR connector is ideal for directly connecting to H.320
video codec devices such as PictureTel, Vtel, and CLI. These device applications are
used for group-room conferencing applications and distance learning, typically
over an ISDN dial network. The PathBuilder S330/S310 platforms simulate a dial
ISDN network over an ATM network, allowing you to integrate voice, video, and
data on a single ATM network.
The RS-366-based video dial feature allows a dial-based video session using the
ATM circuit emulation provided by the PathBuilder S330/S310 platforms. The
PathBuilder S330/S310 supports two modes of video conferencing: point-to-point
and multi-point.
Point-to-Point Video Conferencing
In point-to-point video conferencing two or more PathBuilder S330/S310 CBR
modules are connected via their serial (V.35/RS-366) ports. To set up point-to-point
conferencing, you build virtual circuits (defined by transmit and receive vpi/vci
combinations) to connect the remote units. To activate a point-to-point
conference, both ends must dial their respective destination phone numbers over
the RS-366 interface. Video data is then transmitted and received over the V.35
interface. No bandwidth is allocated until the connection is made.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CBR Module 239
Figure 178 illustrates point-to-point video conferencing between three PathBuilder
possible routing tables for the three units.
Figure 178 Point-to-Point Video Conferencing
Video/Audio
Codec
Video/Audio
Codec
Video/Audio
Codec
V.35/
V.35/
V.35/
RS-366
RS-366
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
PBS330
#1111
PBS330
#2222
PBS330
#3333
ATM
Table 33 Point-to-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #1111)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
Status
active
idle
2222
3333
0/1
0/1
0/2
0/3
384k
Table 34 Point-to-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #2222)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
Status
active
idle
1111
3333
0/2
0/2
0/1
0/3
384k
Table 35 Point-to-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #3333)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
Status
idle
1111
2222
0/3
0/3
0/1
0/2
384k
idle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Multi-point Video Conferencing
In multi-point video conferencing an MCU (Multi Conference Unit) device is
connected to one T1-DSX/E1 CBR port of a PathBuilder S600 or PathBuilder
S330/S310 at the central site. The remote PathBuilder S330/S310 switches
communicate with each other via their serial (V.35/RS-366) ports, as they do in
point-to-point video conferencing. In addition, the remote units can communicate
with the MCU at the central site over a vpi/vci associated with a fractional T1/E1
bundle of the CBR port connected to the MCU. When a remote unit dials the
number associated with that vpi/vci, the central unit sees activity on that line and
automatically starts transmitting over the vpi/vci, thus completing the circuit.
Figure 179 illustrates multi-point video conferencing between three remote
PathBuilder S330 switches (#1111, #2222, and #3333) and one central
PathBuilder S600 switch (#4444) connected to an MCU.
Figure 179 Multi-point Video Conferencing
Video/Audio
Codec
Video/Audio
Codec
Video/Audio
Codec
V.35/
V.35/
V.35/
RS-366
RS-366
RS-366
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
RS-449/
RS-530/
X.21
PBS330
#1111
PBS330
#2222
PBS330
#3333
ATM
n x T1/E1
PBS600
#4444
MCU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Compression Module 241
To set up multi-point video conferencing, you build virtual circuits (defined by
transmit and receive vpi/vci combinations) between the remote units and between
the remote units and the central unit. The remote units can use the same vpi/vci to
communicate with the central unit (one at a time), or you can allocate different
channels and set up separate virtual connections to each remote unit.
remote units have been allocated different channels on the central unit’s T1 line.
Table 36 Multi-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #1111)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
384k
384k
Status
idle
2222
3333
4444
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/2
0/3
0/2
idle
active
Table 37 Multi-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #2222)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
384k
384k
Status
idle
1111
3333
4444
0/2
0/2
0/6
0/1
0/3
0/7
idle
active
Table 38 Multi-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Remote Unit #3333)
Destination # Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci
Speed
384k
384k
384k
Status
idle
1111
2222
4444
0/3
0/1
0/3
0/2
idle
0/12
0/13
active
Table 39 Multi-point Video Conferencing Routing Table (Central Unit #4444)
Source
1111
Tx vpi/vci Rx vpi/vci DSOs
0/2
0/1
channels 0-5
2222
0/7
0/6
channels 6-11
channels 12-17
3333
0/13
0/12
Voice Compression
Module
The optional Voice Compression module (VCM) provides one T1 or E1 port. It is
similar in function to the CBR module, but it employs compression algorithms that
allow more voice calls to be placed through the same bandwidth.
The incoming voice signal is carried on one or more of the T1/E1 port’s 24/31 DS0
channels. The voice data in each DS0 channel is in PCM format. This data is
compressed by the DSP, and the output from the DSP is encapsulated into FRF.11
packets by the host CPU on the VCM daughtercard. The packets are then passed
to the mother board through the PCI interface, handed over to the AAL5 SAR, and
transmitted to the ATM interface.
In the reverse direction, compressed voice packets are received by the SAR on the
ATM interface in FRF.11 format. The packets are then passed to the VCM
daughtercard via the PCI interface. The packets are unpacked by the daughtercard
CPU before they are handed to the DSP, which decompressed the voice data and
plays out the voice onto the T1/E1 PCM interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
APPENDIX B: PATHBUILDER S330/S310 MODULE AND APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Supported Voice The VCM supports the following features:
Compression Features
n
G.729A, G.726, and G.711 compression algorithms—You must configure
the voice coding (compression) for each DS0 channel. The decompression runs
in the same mode as the compression. In addition, the remote end must be set
up to run the same mode as the local end—there is no auto-switching for the
voice compression mode. For details about configuring VCM channels, see
n
Voice activity detection—Voice packets are handled differently in the receive
and transmit directions:
n
From T1/E1 line to packet network, the host CPU constantly polls the DSP
packet buffers for voice data. When it detects a voice packet, it
encapsulates the packet into an FRF.11 subframe and forwards it to an
output interface.
n
From packet network to T1/E1 line, FRF.11 packets are decoded,
demultiplexed, and sent to the DSP as soon as they are received on the PCI
interface.
n
Fax relay—Fax data is transferred using FRF.11 Fax Relay Transfer. The DSP
detects if the fax preamble is a single frequency tone or a non-single frequency
tone.
n
If the DSP detects a single frequency preamble, it modulates the fax using
modulation type V.21 and transfers the fax data at 300bps using T.30 fax
payload format.
n
If the DSP detects a non-single frequency preamble, it modulates the fax
using various modulation types and transfers the fax data at 300bps to
14400 bps using T.4 payload format.
n
DTMF relay—Dialed digits are detected by the DSP and transported using
FRF.11 Dialed Digit Payload format. The dialed digit frame is transported only
when a DTMF tone is detected. The DTMF tone is generated by the DSP when
dialed digits are received through the packet network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
loopbacks 182
Symbols
setting ports and circuits for CAS
AFA.
specifications 24
CBR port modes
CBR serial port
B
Numbers
CBR T1-DSX and V35 Configuration
menu 122
3Com bulletin board service (3Com
BBS) 206
bridge
addressing 224
CBR T1-DSX ports
ATM 230
3ComFacts 206
configuring 121
multiframe structure for 3x64kbit/s
DS1 235
community name
configuring 112
filtering 223
reassembly 228
segmentation 228
statistics 195
A
initial 135
constructing 120
buffers
address translation
administrative 88
AFA 91
age 120
configuration
alarms
bridge 112
C
common 169
FAM 177
managing 165
QSIM 177
CTX 85
cards
configuring 86
CBR card
initial 63
menu 81
configuring 128
CBR module
applications
configuring 121
configuring circuits for clear channel
signaling 140
configuring circuits for structured data
DBA 140
DXI 218
Ethernet/voice 228
HDLC/SDLC 219
ATM
ports 88
configuring circuits for structured voice
DBA 140
overview 209
installed 34
LEDs 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
INDEX
DFA
diagnostics 165
interface.
DS1/E1 UNI module
alarms 171
DS3 105
DS3 UNI module
port, Ethernet card.
Ethernet port
connecting 51
LEDs 51
interface.
VT100 59
F
failure 102
Configuration Management (Main menu
option) 61
Configuring 121
FAM
alarms 177
Fault Management (Main menu
option) 61
setting 88
connections
configuring 105
effects of installing on IMA
LEDs 57
loopbacks 181
OC3/STM-1 port (multi-mode
fiber) 52
filtering
OC3/STM-1 port (single-mode
fiber) 52
DSX-1/E1 CBR module
alarms 176
DXI protocols
port 41
statistics 195
connectivity
LAN 231
Connector 50
firmware
full system configuration
conventions 2
text 2
See also ATM DXI mode.
CTX 209
configuring 85
CTX Queue Buffer Configuration
menu 87
E
E3 UNI module
effects of installing on IMA
loopbacks 182
EMI x
Encoding 130
D
Data Bytes
G
checking to determine DBA Bits mask
setting 139
data flow
group 92
partitioning 211
groups
Ethernet card
interface.
Ethernet Configuration Port/Card Selection
menu 111
adding 92
deleting 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
deletion of Group 1 when DS3/E3
modifying 97
HDLC/SDLC 219
protocol 214
H
local host IP address
N
I
IMA
configuring 65
location 119
IMA groups
OC3/STM-1 180
adding 94
configuring 92
loopbacks 179
deleting 97
modifying 97
O
OC3/STM-1 181
configuring 104
OCC3/STM-1 181
index 163
LOS 56
connecting 52
installation 29
overview 30
procedures 33
M
LEDs 53
loopbacks 181
statistics 189
interworking
OC3/STM-1 UNI port
delay
optional modules
options 61
Manage IP Network Configuration
menu 65
alarms 81
network 221
service 220
IP address
configuring 75
LEDs 81
management terminal
memory partition
Menus 61
menus
hierarchy 61
modes
installing 35
output queues
priorities 211
L
LEDs
P
passwords
default 60
setting 69
PathBuilder 27
Pathbuilder 330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
INDEX
PathBuilder 330/310
PathBuilder S310
upgrading to PathBuilder S330
PathBuilder S330/S310
applications 229
overview 3
PathBuilder S330/S310. See also
PathBuilder S330/S310.
Payload 155
pecifications 8
Performance Management (Main menu
option) 61
Performance Management menu
OC3/STM-1 189
performance monitoring
pinouts
port 154
ports
See also names of specific ports.
power
connecting 42
LEDs 50
statistics 193
Q
QSIM
alarms 177
serial port.
R
servicing ix
shapers
Receiving 29
See also power supply.
shelf
Signaling 132
signaling 126
Silence Compression & Noise
Injection 130
SIM Configuration Port/Card Selection
menu 107
SIM Port Configuration Port/LMI Selection
menu 107
configuring 117
Spanning Tree
RS-232 port
entering initial configuration
information 77
RS366 (video) virtual circuit
adding 142
RS366 (video) virtual circuits
definition 134
instances 225
operation 224
S
connecting 38
serial card
specifications 38
priority 151
Specifying 77
speed 163
Statistics 189
statistics
configuring 110
bridge 195
performance 185
protocols
See also serial port, serial card.
timing 214
DXI 216
PVC virtual circuits
serial port
definition 134
PVCs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper
virtual circuits
adding 134
configuration parameters (OC3/STM-1
port) 151
configuration parameters (serial
port) 151
configuration parameters (serial port,
DXI) 154
configuration parameters (serial port,
configuration parameters (serial port,
HDLC/SDLC) 154
status 163
structured service
transparent encapsulation mode
subnet mask
System Administration (Main menu
option) 61
troubleshooting 165
system clock
configuration parameters (T1/E1
port) 151
configuring 133
configuring 63
configuring for clear channel
signaling 140
configuring for structured data
DBA 140
configuring for structured voice
DBA 140
deleting 160
U
system configuration
UNI groups
initial 63
adding 92
system information
configuring 92
deleting 97
modifying 97
in-band 137
unstructured service
upgrades, from PathBuilder S310 to
URL 205
T
T1/E1 card
modifying 159
overview 211
configuring 103
T1/E1 ports
scheme 226
statistics 200
configuring 89
V
connecting 42
voice compression module
voice compression module (VCM)
configuring 129
LEDs 42
video
loopbacks 180
overview 3
specificatons 10
statistics 186
conferencing 238
technical support
video dial
Voice Compression, voice compression
module (VCM)
VPC 136
managing 160
VT100
Virtual Circuit Statistics by Shaper Detail
screen 203
timing 91
configuring 59
W
external 214
internal 214
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Com Corporation LIMITED WARRANTY
HARDWARE
3Com warrants its hardware products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for
the following lengths of time from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller:
Network Interface Cards
Lifetime
1 year*
Other hardware products
*unless otherwise specified above
Spare parts and spares kits
90 days
If a product does not operate as warranted above during the applicable warranty period, 3Com shall, at its option and expense,
repair the defective product or part, deliver to Customer an equivalent product or part to replace the defective item, or refund
to Customer the purchase price paid for the defective product. All products that are replaced will become the property of
3Com. Replacement products may be new or reconditioned. Any replaced or repaired product or part has a ninety (90) day
warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty period, whichever is longer.
SOFTWARE
3Com warrants that the software programs licensed from it will perform in substantial conformance to the program
specifications therefor for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller. 3Com
warrants the media containing software against failure during the warranty period. No updates are provided. 3Com’s sole
obligation with respect to this express warranty shall be (at 3Com’s discretion) to refund the purchase price paid by Customer
for any defective software products, or to replace any defective media with software which substantially conforms to applicable
3Com published specifications. Customer assumes responsibility for the selection of the appropriate applications program and
associated reference materials. 3Com makes no warranty or representation that its software products will meet Customer’s
requirements or work in combination with any hardware or applications software products provided by third parties, that the
operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be
corrected. For any third party products listed in the 3Com software product documentation or specifications as being
compatible, 3Com will make reasonable efforts to provide compatibility, except where the non-compatibility is caused by a
“bug” or defect in the third party's product.
YEAR 2000 WARRANTY
In addition to the Hardware Products Warranty and Software Products Warranty identified above, 3Com warrants that all
Heritage 3Com products sold or licensed to Customer on and after January 1, 1998 that are date sensitive will continue
performing properly with regard to such date data on and after January 1, 2000, provided that all other products used by
Customer in connection or combination with the 3Com products, including hardware, software, and firmware, accurately
exchange date data with the 3Com products, with the exception of those products identified at 3Com’s Web site,
http://www.3com.com/products/yr2000.html, as not meeting this standard. A product is considered a “Heritage 3Com product”
if it is a member of a product family which was manufactured by 3Com prior to its merger with US Robotics Corporation. This
Year 2000 limited warranty does not apply to Heritage US Robotics Corporation products. If it appears that any such product
does not perform properly with regard to such date data on and after January 1, 2000, and Customer notifies 3Com before the
later of April 1, 2000, or ninety (90) days after purchase of the product from 3Com or its authorized reseller, 3Com shall, at its
option and expense, provide a software update which would effect the proper performance of such product, repair such
product, deliver to Customer an equivalent product to replace such product, or if none of the foregoing is feasible, refund to
Customer the purchase price paid for such product.
Any software update or replaced or repaired product will carry a Year 2000 Warranty for ninety (90) days or until April 1, 2000,
whichever is later.
OBTAINING WARRANTY
SERVICE
Customer must contact 3Com’s Corporate Service Center or an Authorized 3Com Service Center within the applicable
warranty period to obtain warranty service authorization. Dated proof of purchase may be required. Products returned to
3Com’s Corporate Service Center must be pre-authorized by 3Com with a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number
marked on the outside of the package, and sent prepaid and packaged appropriately for safe shipment, and it is recommended
that they be insured. The repaired or replaced item will be shipped to Customer, at 3Com’s expense, not later than thirty (30)
days after receipt of the defective product by 3Com.
Dead- or Defective-on-Arrival. In the event a product completely fails to function or exhibits a defect in materials or
workmanship within the first forty-eight (48) hours of installation but no later than thirty (30) days after the date of purchase,
and this is verified by 3Com, it will be considered dead- or defective-on-arrival (DOA) and a replacement shall be provided by
advance replacement. The replacement product will normally be shipped not later than three (3) business days after 3Com’s
verification of the DOA product, but may be delayed due to export or import procedures. When an advance replacement is
provided and Customer fails to return the defective product to 3Com within fifteen (15) days after shipment of the
replacement, 3Com will charge Customer for the replacement product, at list price.
3Com shall not be responsible for any software, firmware, information, or memory data of Customer contained in, stored on,
or integrated with any products returned to 3Com for repair, whether under warranty or not.
WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE
IF A 3COM PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE, CUSTOMER’S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THAT
WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID, AT 3COM’S OPTION. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, TERMS, OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WARRANTIES, TERMS, OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. 3COM NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR
IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
3COM SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED
DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER’S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLECT,
IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR MODIFY, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND
THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING, OR OTHER HAZARD.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, 3COM ALSO EXCLUDES FOR ITSELF AND ITS SUPPLIERS ANY LIABILITY, WHETHER
BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR
DATA, OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USE, PERFORMANCE, FAILURE, OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS, EVEN IF 3COM OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID, AT 3COM’S OPTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT BE AFFECTED IF ANY
REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN SHALL FAIL OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
DISCLAIMER
Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or the limitation of incidental
or consequential damages for certain products supplied to consumers or the limitation of liability for personal injury, so the
above limitations and exclusions may be limited in their application to you. When the implied warranties are not allowed to be
excluded in their entirety, they will be limited to the duration of the applicable written warranty. This warranty gives you
specific legal rights which may vary depending on local law.
GOVERNING LAW
This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California, U.S.A. excluding its conflicts of laws principles
and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
3Com Corporation, 5400 Bayfront Plaza, Santa Clara, CA 95052-8145 (408) 764-5000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
ACR Electronics Marine GPS System 27666 User Manual
Advantech Satellite Radio C3956T User Manual
Aga Ranges Refrigerator 61ARA 115V User Manual
Aiwa Stereo System NSX A909 User Manual
American Standard Indoor Furnishings T970702 User Manual
AO Smith Water Heater ACVT 50 100 User Manual
Asus Computer Accessories USBBT211 User Manual
Asus Network Card CUVL VM User Manual
Audiovox Remote Starter PRO 9900 User Manual
Barco Home Theater Screen R5976522 03 User Manual